Home

Juniper Networks EX3200 User's Manual

1. 9020054 Y Related Topics m me ports Uplink module Enter button Chassis Status LEDs in EX5200 Switches on page 17 Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 20 Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 40 LCD Panel in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 15 Installing and Removing EX5200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch Chapter 1 EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 155 Removing an Uplink Module from an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 175 Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch The a E rear panel of the EX3200 switch consists of the following components Protective earthing terminal Temperature shutdown LED Management Ethernet port Console port USB port ESD point Fan tray Power supply Figure 5 on page 9 shows the rear panel of an EX5200 switch with a 320 W power supply All EX3200 switches have the same rear panel The 320 W AC power supply and the 190 W DC power supply are flush with the chassis The 600 W AC power supply and 950 W AC power supply extend out of the chassis by 2 25 in The power cord retainer clips extend out of the power supply by 5 in Figure 3 EX3200 Switch Rear Panel Protective earthing terminal ESD point Temperature shutdown LED
2. gt WARNING Avvertenza L eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita osservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia WARNING Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet ma skje i henhold til nasjonale lover og forskrifter WARNING Aviso A descartagem final deste produto dever ser efectuada de acordo com os regulamentos e a legislac o nacional WARNING jAtenci n El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse seg n todas las leyes y regulaciones nacionales gt bb WARNING Varning Slutlig kassering av denna produkt b r sk tas i enlighet med landets alla lagar och f reskrifter Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 258 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 m Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 m Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches on page 219 m Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches mm 233 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 234 1H Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Swit
3. 164 Removing Switch Components Removing Switch Components 171 Figure 67 Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 uud M 173 Figure 68 Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 Switch 175 Figure 69 Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch 0 ee 175 Figure 70 Sliding the Screwdriver to the Narrow Part of the Keyhole 177 Figure 71 Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 le EEN 177 Figure 72 Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch 179 Figure 75 Virtual Chassis Cable Connector in an EX4200 Switch 181 Returning Hardware Returning the Switch or Switch Components 197 Figure 74 Location of the Serial Number ID Label on an EX3200 Switch 199 Figure 75 Location of the Serial Number ID Label on an EX4200 Switch 199 Safety Information Power and Electrical Safety Information 235 Figure 76 Place a Component into an Antistatic Bag 257 List of Figures W xvii Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches xviii WI List of Figures List of Tables Part 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview Table 1 EX3200 Switch Models sssssssssssss eee Table 2 EX4200 Switch Models cimil db oe et t ee os Table 5 Physical Specifications of the EX3200 and EX4200 Switch BELICE T rM TN Component Descrip
4. Related Topics m Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches on page 103 m Planning the Virtual Chassis on page 102 m Understanding Virtual Chassis Components m Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on page 101 mw Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch on page 137 Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches M 77 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 78 MW Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation m Site Preparation on page 81 Mounting and Clearance Requirements on page 87 m Cable Specifications on page 95 m Planning Power Requirements on page 97 m Planning the Virtual Chassis on page 101 Planning for Switch Installation Mm 79 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 80 1H Planning for Switch Installation Chapter 4 Site Preparation m Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 81 m General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 85 m Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 85 m Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches on page 85 Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches The checklist in Table 24 on page 81 summarizes the tasks you need to perform when preparing a site for EX5200 or EX4200 s
5. 5 tout Gee hate tet i d theta 55 Figure 26 XFP Uplink Module encre ore Pte t ee re a ete t 57 Planning for Switch Installation Mounting and Clearance Requirements 87 Figure 27 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches ssssssssss ee 91 Figure 28 Airflow Through the EX3200 Switch Chassis 92 Figure 29 Airflow Through the EX4200 Switch Chassis 92 Planning Power Requirements 97 Figure 20 AC PUB TV DCS recessed E Ale Me Eed tan 99 List of Figures M XV Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Part 3 xvi Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 List of Figures Planning the Virtual Chassis 101 Figure 51 EX4200 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in a Ring Topology Using Short and Long Cables Option 1 105 Figure 52 EX4200 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in a Ring Topology Using Short and Long Cables Option 2 ssss 104 Figure 55 EX4200 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in a Ring Topology Using Short and Medium Cales 104 Figure 54 EX4200 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected in a Ring Topology Using Medium and Long Cables Option 1 104 Figure 55 EX4200 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected in a Ring Topology Using Medium and Long Cables Option 2 105 Installing and Connectin
6. Connect the cable to port 0 ge 0 0 0 on the front panel of the switch m EX8200 switch Connect the cable to the port labeled MGMT on the Switch Fabric and Routing Engine SRE module in slot SREO in an EX8208 switch or on the Routing Engine RE module in slot REO in an EX8216 switch These ports are configured as the DHCP server with the default IP address 192 168 1 1 The switch can assign an IP address to the management PC in the IP address range 192 168 1 2 through 192 168 1 253 Li NOTE The switch will transition into initial setup mode only when the switch is in the factory default configuration Transition the switch into initial setup mode m EX2200 switch Press the mode button located on the lower right corner of the front panel for 10 seconds m EX3200 EX4200 or EX8200 switch Use the Menu and Enter buttons located to the right of the LCD panel see Figure 66 on page 164 Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure m 163 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 164 m Figure 66 LCD Panel in an EX3200 EX4200 or EX8200 Switch LCD Menu Enter Chassis panel button button status LEDs GC OAM Osvs OMST 9020093 1 Press the Menu button until you see MAINTENANCE MENU Then press the Enter button 2 Press Menu until you see ENTER EZSetup Then press Enter 5 Press Enter to confirm setup and continue with EZSetup If you have confi
7. NOTE The A and B terminals are referred to as RTN and A and B terminals are referred to as 48 V in DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches on page 245 and DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 2 Component Descriptions Figure 17 320 W AC Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches ACOK DCOK Locking LED LED lever Handle 9020066 AC power Fan exhaust appliance inlet Figure 18 600 W and 930 W AC Power Supplies in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches ACOK DC Ok Locking LED LED lever Fan exhaust 9020065 AC power appliance inlet Handle Figure 19 DC Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Locking lever Terminal block i nd Table 11 on page 28 lists the minimum power requirements for each model of EX3200 switch The maximum power available to each PoE port is 15 4 W 9020202 Handle Fan exhaust Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 27 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 11 Minimum Power Requirements for an EX3200 Switch Model Number Number of PoE enabled Ports Minimum Power Requirement EX3200 24T 8 320 W EX3200 48T 8 320 W EX3200 24P 24 600 W EX3200 48P 48 930 W EX3200 24T DC 0 190 W EX3200 48T DC 0 190 W Table 12 on page 28 lists the minimum po
8. Understanding Virtual Chassis Components Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 74 Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on page 101 Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches on page 105 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 Planning the Virtual Chassis Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches You can install EX4200 switches in a single rack or multiple racks or in different wiring closets and interconnect them to form a Virtual Chassis There are two dedicated Virtual Chassis ports VCPs on the rear panel of the EX4200 switch that are used exclusively to interconnect EX4200 switches as a Virtual Chassis The physical location of the switches in a Virtual Chassis is restricted only by the maximum length supported for cables to connect the VCPs The maximum cable length for interconnecting the dedicated VCPs is 5 meters If you want to interconnect EX4200 switches that are located beyond the reach of the dedicated VCP cables you can install the XFP uplink module the SFP uplink module or the SFP uplink module and set the uplink module ports as VCP interfaces See Setting an Uplink Module Port as a Virtual Chassis Port CLI Procedure a NOTE The interfaces for the two dedicated VCPs are operationa
9. d ID oo 0098 ll MGMT CON ERA ARR 2 O EJ O O SUBES WSI Management Ethernet port Related Topics Console USB port port Fan tray Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch on page 39 Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch on page 31 Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 236 Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch mm 9 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 a Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch 10 The front panel of an EX4200 switch consists of the following components m Network ports depending on the switch model either of m 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet ports some or all of which are enabled for Power over Ethernet PoE m lOOBase FX 1000Base X SFP ports for use with fiber optic connections m Uplink module ports SFP SFP or XFP ports The uplink module is an optional feature m LCD panel and the LCD navigation buttons m Chassis status LEDs m Network port LEDs Figure 4 on page 10 shows the front panel of an EX4200 switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet ports Figure
10. EX SFP GE40KT15R13 Rate 1000 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Single Transmitter Wavelength 1550 nm Receiver Wavelength 1310 nm Minimum Launch Power 6 5 dBm Maximum Launch Power 2 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 5 dBm Maximum Input Power 25 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 40 km 24 8 miles DOM Support Available 52 m Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base LX Model Number EX SFP 1GE LX40K Rate 1000 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Single Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Minimum Launch Power 14dBm Maximum Launch Power 8 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 45 dBm Maximum Input Power 5 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 40 km 24 8 miles DOM Support Available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 53 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base LH or
11. Figure 30 on page 99 illustrates the plug on the power cord for each country or region listed in Table 31 on page 98 Figure 30 AC Plug Types g040052 Related Topics m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 99 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 100 HN AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis a Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on page 101 m Planning the Virtual Chassis on page 102 m Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches on page 105 m Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration CLI Procedure on page 105 Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch Related Topics Virtual Chassis is a feature in Juniper Networks EX4200 Ethernet Switches that allows you to interconnect two or more EX4200 switches enabling them to operate as a unified single high bandwidth switch You can interconnect a maximum of 10 EX4200 switches through the dedicated 64 Gbps Virtual Chassis ports VCPs or the uplink module ports
12. Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed for wet environments Operate the EX Series switch only when it is properly grounded Ensure that the separate protective earthing terminal provided on this product is permanently connected to earth Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches m 207 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet metal parts unless instructions are provided in the hardware documentation for this product Such an action could cause severe electrical shock Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame Such an action could result in electrical shock or fire Avoid spilling liquid onto the EX Series switch chassis or onto any switch component Such an action could cause electrical shock or damage the switch Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been disconnected from their power source Such an action could cause electrical shock Always ensure that all modules power supplies and cover panels are fully inserted and that the installation screws are fully tightened AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for
13. Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch M 177 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 178 m Before you begin removing a transceiver from an EX Series switch ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available m An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat m Needlenose pliers m Rubber safety caps to cover the transceiver and fiber optic cable connector m A dust cover to cover the port Figure 72 on page 179 shows how to remove an SFP transceiver The procedure is the same for all transceiver types To remove a transceiver from an EX Series switch 1 Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 2 Labelthe cable connected to the transceiver so that you can reconnect it correctly WARNING Do not look directly into a fiber optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber optic cables Fiber optic transceivers and fiber optic cables connected to transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes WARNING Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing a cable The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light CAUTION Do not bend fiber optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches
14. The port and the link are active and there is link activity m Onsteadily The port and the link are active but there is no link activity m Off The port is not active Table 10 on page 25 describes the Status LED administrative status Table 10 Status LED on the Management Port on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch LED Color State and Description Status Green m Onsteadily Administrative status is enabled m Off Administrative status is disabled Management Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 25 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics m See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 for port location m See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 for port location m Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Management on page 152 Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 26 m The power supply in EX5200 and EX4200 switches see Figure 17 on page 27 Figure 18 on page 27 and Figure 19 on page 27 is a hot removable and hot insertable field replaceable unit FRU that you can install on the rear panel without powering off the switch or disrupting the switching function EX4200 switches have an internal redundant power supply making the power supply in EX4200 switches fully redundant The power supply in EX3200 switches is not redundant EX5200 and EX4200 switches use power that provides two DC output voltages 12 V for system
15. now log in with the CLI or the J Web interface to continue configuring the switch If you use the J Web interface to continue configuring the switch the Web session is 162 Mm Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure Chapter 12 Performing Initial Configuration redirected to the new management IP address If the connection cannot be made the J Web interface displays instructions for starting a J Web session Related Topics m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 Installing and Connecting an EX2200 Switch Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 115 Installing and Connecting an EX8208 Switch Installing and Connecting an EX8216 Switch Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure There are two ways to connect and configure an EX Series switch one method is through the console using the CLI and the other is using the J Web interface This topic describes the J Web procedure To run the ezsetup script the switch must have the factory default configuration If you have configured anything on the switch and want to run ezsetup revert to the factory default configuration See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch To connect and configure an EX Series switch using the J Web interface 1 Connect the Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the PC to the switch m EX2200 EX3200 or EX4200 switch
16. 9 590 Ca 19000 SN BP0207452211 A KEA Serial number ID label Locating the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch The power supplies fan trays and uplink modules installed in EX Series switches are field replaceable units FRUS For each of these FRUs you must remove the FRU from the switch chassis to see the FRU s serial number ID label m Power Supply The serial number ID label is on the top of the power supply See Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 172 m Fan tray The serial number ID label is on the back of the fan tray See Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174 m Uplink module The serial number ID label is on the circuit board See Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 175 Related Topics m Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches on page 199 m Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 197 Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement obtain a Return Materials Authorization RMA from Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC Locating the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch m 199 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3
17. EX4200 24F Switch with 24 SFP Porte 11 Figure 7 EX4200 Switch Rear Panel 12 Component Descriptions 13 Figure 8 LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 0 0 0 0 eee 15 Figure 9 Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3200 Switch ssssssssssssss 17 Figure 10 Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch ssssssssssssss 19 Figure 11 LEDs on the Network Ports on the Front Panel c 20 Figure 12 LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP Uplink Module 20 Figure 13 LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP Uplink Module 21 Figure 14 LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the XFP Uplink Module 21 Figure 15 LEDs on the Management Port on an EX5200 Switch 25 Figure 16 LEDs on the Management Port on an EX4200 Switch 25 Figure 17 520 W AC Power Supply in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches 27 Figure 18 600 W and 950 W AC Power Supplies in EX3200 and EX4200 SWILEFIEST ii eA re tene eq toa y A a nette eie E e ee 27 Figure 19 DC Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 27 Figure 20 Fan Tray Used in an EX3200 Switch eriari ei iinei eriin Er 31 Figure 21 Airflow Through the EX3200 Switch Chassis ssssseess 31 Figure 22 Fan Tray Used in an EX4200 Switch 0 0 0 eee eee E iken 32 Figure 23 Airflow Through the EX4200 Switch Chassis sssseeess 55 Figure 24 SFP UplinkR Module cre rH pere RO eee hin 54 Figure 25zSEPsE Uplink Module
18. Model Number EX SFP 1GE LH 1000Base ZX Rate 1000 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 1550 nm Minimum Launch Power 2 dBm Maximum Launch Power 5 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 25 dBm Maximum Input Power 5 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 70 km 45 5 miles DOM Support Available 54 HW Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 19 Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Ethernet Standard Specifications 100Base FX Model Number EX SFP 1FE FX Rate 100 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Minimum Launch Power 20 dBm Maximum Launch Power 14 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 32 5 dBm Maximum Input Power 8 dBm Fiber Type MMF Core Cladding Size 62 5 125 um Fiber Grade FDDI OM1 Modal Bandwidth 500 Mhz km Distance 2 km 1 2 miles DOM Support Not available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 55 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 19 Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 100Base LX Model Number
19. Unlit The speed of the transceiver installed in the port is not the same as the speed at which the uplink module port is configured to operate The speed of the XFP uplink module ports is always 10 Gbps therefore the LED is always green Related Topics m Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 m Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 10 m Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 33 m LCD Panel in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 13 Management Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches The management port on EX5200 and EX4200 switches has two LEDs that indicate link activity and port status see Figure 15 on page 25 or Figure 16 on page 25 The management port is set to full duplex and the speed is set to 100 Mbps 24 Mm Management Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 2 Component Descriptions Figure 15 LEDs on the Management Port on an EX3200 Switch Link Activity E Status LED H LED bi 2 Sfp e G CH LH 9020400 Link Activity Status LED LED PRERERORERER IR RARER LC A CORRS S ENESER o 9020401 eL el VER KS Table 9 on page 25 describes the Link Activity LED Table 9 Link Activity LED on the Management Port on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch LED Color State and Description Link Activity Green m Blinking
20. fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima Estas termina es de cabo dever o ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos e dever o prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor jAtenci n Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado utilizar terminales para cables homologados tales como las de tipo bucle cerrado o espada con las leng etas de conexi n vueltas hacia arriba Estos terminales deber n ser del tamano apropiado para los cables que se utilicen y tendr n que sujetar tanto el aislante como el conductor Varning Nar flertr diga ledningar kr vs m ste godkanda ledningskontakter anv ndas t ex kabelsko av sluten eller ppen typ med uppatvand tapp Storleken pa dessa kontakter m ste vara avpassad till ledningarna och m ste kunna h lla b de isoleringen och ledaren fastklamda Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 m DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 242 m DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches on page 244 m DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches on page 245 TN Power Warning for EX Series Switches A WARNING The switch is designed to work with a TN power system TN Power Warning for EX Series S
21. from the front of a 19 in rack or cabinet by using the 2 in recess front brackets in the separately orderable four post rack mount kit You can mount the switch in this recessed position on two post or four post racks and cabinets On a desk or other level surface by using rubber feet The switch is shipped with four rubber feet to be used to stabilize the chassis on a desk or other level surface On a wall by using the separately orderable wall mount kit The holes in the mounting brackets are placed at 1 U 1 75 in or 4 45 cm apart so that the switch can be mounted in any rack or cabinet that provides holes spaced at that distance Related Topics m Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 118 Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 121 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 124 Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface on page 117 116 Mm Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chapter 9 Installing the Switch Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall on page 125 m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on a desk or other level surface by using the 4 rubber feet that are shipped with the switch The rubber feet stabilize the chas
22. 10 m USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch on page 59 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 52 m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 m Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 m Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on page 101 Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch 9020084 Field Replaceable Units in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 Chapter 2 Component Descriptions m LCD Panel in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 15 m Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 m Chassis Status LEDs in EX3200 Switches on page 17 m Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 18 m Network Port LEDs in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 20 m Management Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 24 m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 29 m DC Power Supply LEDs in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 50 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch on page 31 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 32 m Uplink Modules in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 33 LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches The LCD panel on the front panel of EX5200 and EX4200 swi
23. 12 A for switches with 48 ports equipped for PoE Table 30 DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Item Specification DC input voltage 56 through 72 VDC DC input current 7 A maximum Power supply output 190 W Output holdup time 1 ms minimum Power Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches M 97 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches NOTE The DC power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches does not support Power over Ethernet PoE you can use either an external power injector or an AC power supply to supply power to PoE devices that you connect to the switch NOTE For DC power supplies we recommend that you provide at least 7 5 A 48 VDC and use a facility circuit breaker rated for 10 A minimum Doing so enables you to operate the switch in any configuration without upgrading the power infrastructure and allows the switch to function at full capacity using multiple power supplies Related Topics m AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 98 m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Detachable AC power cords are supplied with the switch The coupler is type C15
24. 132 m Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174 m Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 133 m Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 175 mw Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 136 m Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 Chassis Status LEDs in EX3200 Switches The front panel of an EX3200 switch has three LEDs on the far right side of the panel next to the LCD panel see Figure 9 on page 17 Figure 9 Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3200 Switch Menu Enter Chassis dna ouai status LEDs OA osys ouer 9020093 Chassis Status LEDs in EX3200 Switches m 17 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 5 on page 18 describes the chassis status LEDs in an EX3200 switch their colors and states and the status they indicate You can view the colors of the three LEDs remotely through the CLI by issuing the operational mode command show chassis lcd Table 5 Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3200 Switch LED Label Color State and Description ALM Alarm Unlit There is no alarm Red There is a major alarm Amber There is a minor alarm SYS System Green m Onsteadily JUNOS Software for EX Series switches has been loaded on the switch m Blinking The switch is booting MST Master Green This LED is always on and is meaningful only on EX4200 switche
25. 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Portions of the GateD software copyright 1991 D L S Associates This product includes software developed by Maker Communications Inc copyright 9 1996 1997 Maker Communications Inc uniper Networks the Juniper Networks logo JUNOS NetScreen ScreenOS and Steel Belted Radius are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc in the United States and other countries JUNOSe is a trademark of Juniper Networks Inc All other trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners uniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document Juniper Networks reserves the right to change modify transfer or otherwise revise this publication without notice Products made or sold by Juniper Networks or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the following patents that are owned by or licensed to Juniper Networks U S Patent Nos 5 475 599 5 905 725 5 909 440 6 192 051 6 555 650 6 559 479 6 406 512 6 429 706 6 459 579 6 495 547 6 558 518 6 558 899 6 552 918 6 567 902 6 578 186 and 6 590 785 EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Copyright 9 2010 Juniper Networks Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA Writing Appumon Joseph Aviva Garrett Greg Houde Hemraj Rao S Hareesh Kumar K N Kel
26. 39 Mounting the Switch on Two Posts in a Rack Mounting rack H o o Mounting bracket 9020094 Have a second person secure the switch to the rack by using the appropriate screws Tighten the screws Ensure that the switch chassis is level by verifying that all screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the screws on the other side If the switch is an EX4200 24F model we recommend that you insert dust covers in any unused SFP ports Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet Chapter 9 Installing the Switch m Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 124 m Rack Mounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 221 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on four posts of a 19 in rack or cabinet by using the separately orderable four post rack mount kit The remainder of this topic uses rack to mean rack or cabinet You can mount the switch on two posts in either a two post rack or
27. 5 on page 10 shows the front panel of an EX4200 switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet ports Figure 6 on page 11 shows the front panel of an EX4200 24F switch with 24 SFP ports for use with fiber optic connectors Figure 4 EX4200 Switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet Ports LCD buttons LCD panel and LEDs 9020081 SE Network ports Uplink module Figure 5 EX4200 Switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet Ports LCD panel Menu button LEDs PES ea See eer Ser eer eur s e Bue lo da N N EN g020054 1190 77 eee UE ports Uplink module Enter button Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch Chapter 1 EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview Figure 6 EX4200 24F Switch with 24 SFP Ports LCD buttons LCD panel and LEDs 9020067 Related Topics m Network ports Uplink module Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches on page 18 Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 20 Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch o
28. Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches The weight of a fully loaded EX5200 or EX4200 switch chassis is approximately 22 Ib 10 kg Observe the following guidelines for lifting and moving an EX3200 or EX4200 switch Related Topics m Before installing an EX3200 or EX4200 switch read the guidelines in Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 81 to verify that the intended site meets the specified power environmental and clearance requirements Before lifting or moving the EX5200 or EX4200 switch disconnect all external cables As when lifting any heavy object lift most of the weight with your legs rather than your back Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and avoid twisting your body as you lift Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is solid General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches on page 219 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 116 220 HN Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information Ramp Warning for EX Series Switches A Related Topics WARNING When installing the switch do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10 degrees Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaa
29. Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information or foam packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets Observe the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge ESD damage which can cause intermittent or complete component failures m Always use an ESD grounding strap when you are handling components that are subject to ESD damage and make sure that it is in direct contact with your skin If a grounding strap is not available hold the component in its antistatic bag see Figure 76 on page 257 in one hand and touch the exposed bare metal of the switch with the other hand immediately before inserting the component into the switch A WARNING For safety periodically check the resistance value of the ESD strap The measurement must be in the range of 1 through 10 Mohms m When handling any component that is subject to ESD damage and that is removed from the chassis make sure the equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to the ESD point on the chassis If no grounding strap is available touch the exposed bare metal of the switch to ground yourself before handling the component m Avoid contact between the component that is subject to ESD damage and your clothing ESD voltages emitted from clothing can damage components m When removing or installing a component that is subject to ESD damage always place it component side up on an
30. Display Message You can configure the second line of the LCD to display a custom message temporarily for 5 minutes or permanently To display a custom message temporarily m On an EX5200 switch a standalone EX4200 switch or an EX8200 switch user switch gt set chassis display message message m Onan EX4200 switch in a Virtual Chassis configuration user switch gt set chassis display message message fpc slot slot number where slot number is the member ID of the member switch To display a custom message permanently m Onan EX5200 switch a standalone EX4200 switch or an EX8200 switch user switch gt set chassis display message message permanent m Onan EX4200 switch in a Virtual Chassis configuration user switch gt set chassis display message message fpc slot slot number permanent where slot number is the member ID of the member switch NOTE The Menu button and the Enter button are disabled if the LCD is configured to display a custom message Related Topics To disable the display of the custom message user switch gt clear chassis display message m LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 15 m LCD Panel in an EX8200 Switch Configuring a Custom Display Message WM 167 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Setting the Mode on an SFP Uplink Module CLI Procedure 168 m SFP uplink modules are supported on EX3200 and EX4200 switches You can use these uplink m
31. Dual Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Minimum Launch Power 9 5 dBm Maximum Launch Power 3 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 25 dBm Maximum Input Power 5 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 10 km 6 2 miles DOM Support Available 46 Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base BX U Model Number EX SFP GE10KT15R14 Rate 1000 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Single Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Receiver Wavelength 1490 nm Minimum Launch Power 9 dBm Maximum Launch Power 3 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 50 dBm Maximum Input Power 3 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 10 km 6 2 miles DOM Support Available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 47 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base BX D Model Number EX SFP GE10KT14R13 Rate 1000 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Sin
32. EX4200 Switch Component Quantity Switch 1 Fan tray preinstalled supply Power supply preinstalled if your system order includes a 520 W AC power supply not preinstalled if 1 your system order includes a 600 W AC power supply a 950 W AC power supply or a 190 W DC power Power cord retainer Mounting brackets 2 Mounting screws 8 Rubber feet 4 Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch m 115 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 32 Inventory of Components Provided with an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch continued Component Quantity RJ 45 cable and RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter 1 Virtual Chassis cable for an EX4200 switch 1 Virtual Chassis cable connector retainers for an EX4200 switch 2 Dust covers for ports for an EX4200 24F switch 24 Related Topics m Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 116 Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 115 Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch On two posts in a 19 in rack or cabinet by using the mounting brackets provided with the switch On four posts in a 19 in rack or cabinet by using the separately orderable four post rack mount kit In a position recessed 2 in
33. For personal safety connect the green and yellow wire to safety earth ground at both the switch and the supply side of the DC wiring m The marked input voltage of 48 VDC for a DC powered switch is the nominal voltage associated with the battery circuit and any higher voltages are only to be associated with float voltages for the charging function m Because the switch is a positive ground system you must connect the positive lead to the terminal labeled RTN the negative lead to the terminal labeled 48 VDC and the earth ground to the chassis grounding points m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 242 m DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches on page 244 m DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches on page 245 m DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches on page 246 m Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 m Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches 242 m A WARNING Before performing any of the DC power procedures ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit To ensure that all power is off locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit switch the circuit breaker to
34. For quick and easy problem resolution Juniper Networks has designed an online self service portal called the Customer Support Center CSC that provides you with the following features Find CSC offerings http www juniper net customers support Search for known bugs http www2 juniper net kb Find product documentation http www juniper net techpubs Find solutions and answer questions using our Knowledge Base http kb juniper net Download the latest versions of software and review release notes http www juniper net customers csc software Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications https www juniper net alerts Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum http www juniper net company communities Open a case online in the CSC Case Management tool http www juniper net cm Documentation Feedback BM XXV Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches To verify service entitlement by product serial number use our Serial Number Entitlement SNE Tool https tools juniper net SerialNumberEntitlementSearch Opening a Case with JTAC You can open a case with JTAC on the Web or by telephone m Use the Case Management tool in the CSC at http www juniper net cm m Call 1 888 314 JTAC 1 888 514 5822 toll free in the USA Canada and Mexico For international or direct dial options in countries without toll free numbers see http www junipe
35. Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Rear brackets Related Topics Figure 43 Sliding the Rear Brackets to the Rear of a Four Post Rack Switch Side rail 4 bracket 9004478 Attach the rear brackets to the rear post by using the appropriate screws for your rack Tighten the screws Ensure that the switch chassis is level by verifying that all the screws on the front of the rack are aligned with the screws at the back of the rack Ifthe switch is an EX4200 24F model we recommend that you insert dust covers in any unused SFP ports Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 Connecting AC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 124 Rack Mounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 221 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch in a rack or cabinet such that the switch is recessed inside the rack from the rack front by 2 inches You can use the 2 in recess front brackets provided in the separately orderable four post rack mount ki
36. Hit Enter to boot immediately or space bar for command prompt Press the Spacebar to pause the switch in the loader state after the JUNOS Software has loaded on the switch but before the software starts The loader prompt appears 5 Setthe baud rate loader set baudrate 115200 Press Enter 4 Press Enter when you see the following message Switch baud rate to 115200 bps and press Enter The loader prompt reappears 5 Save the new serial console speed loader save Press Enter The serial console speed is now set to 115200 baud 6 Bootthe software loader boot The boot process proceeds as normal and ends with a login prompt Configuring the Modem 156 m Before you connect the modem you must configure the modem with required port settings E NOTE The following procedure uses Hayes compatible modem commands to configure the modem Ifyour modem is not Hayes compatible see the documentation for your modem for the equivalent modem commands To configure the modem 1 Connect the modem to the desktop or notebook computer 2 Power on the modem Configuring the Modem Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch 5 From the computer start your asynchronous terminal emulation application such as Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal and select the COM port to which the modem is connected for example COM1 4 Configure the port settings shown in Table 55 on page 157 Table 33 Port Sett
37. Installing the Switch Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 115 Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 114 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 116 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface on page 117 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 118 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 121 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 124 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall on page 125 Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch The EX5200 and EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses the hardware components To install and connect an EX3200 or EX4200 switch 1 25 Follow instructions in Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 114 Mount the switch by following instructions appropriate for your site Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 118 using the mounting brackets provided Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 121 using the separately orderable four post rack mount kit Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 124 using the 2 in recess front brackets from the separately orderable four post rack mount kit Mounting an EX5200 or EX4
38. NEBS Criteria Levels Level 5 Compliance m GR 1089 CORE EMC and Electrical Safety for Network Telecommunications Equipment m GR 65 CORE NEBS Physical Protection m The equipment is suitable for installation as part of the Common Bonding Network CBN s The equipment is suitable for installation in locations where the National Electrical Code NEC applies m The battery return connection is to be treated as an Isolated DC return ODC as defined in GR 1089 CORE m Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 255 m Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 256 Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches 256 m Maschinenlarminformations Verordnung 3 GPSGV der h chste Schalldruckpegel betragt 70 dB A oder weniger gem ss EN ISO 7779 Translation The emitted sound pressure is below 70 dB A per EN ISO 7779 Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches Chapter 21 Compliance Information Related Topics m Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 255 m Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 254 Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches m 257 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 258 HN Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches
39. Negative Vport in PoE models 5 TRP2 Transmit receive data pair 2 Positive Vport in PoE models 4 TRP3 Transmit receive data pair 3 5 TRP3 Transmit receive data pair 3 6 TRP2 Transmit receive data pair 2 Positive Vport in PoE models 7 TRP4 Transmit receive data pair 4 40 Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Table 15 Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch continued Chapter 3 Component Specifications Pin Signal Description TRP4 Transmit receive data pair 4 Related Topics m Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 m Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 10 Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch Table 16 EX Series Switches Console Port Connector Pinout Information The console port on an EX Series switch is an RS 232 serial interface that uses an RJ 45 connector to connect to a console management device The default baud rate for the console port is 9600 baud Table 16 on page 41 provides the pinout information for the RJ 45 console connector An RJ 45 cable and an RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter are supplied with the switch eS NOTE If your laptop or PC does not have a DB 9 male connector pin and you want to connect your laptop or PC directly to an EX Series switch use a combination of the RJ 45 to DB 9 female adapter supplied with the switch and a USB to DB 9 male adapter You
40. Physical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches M 7 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch 8 m The front panel of an EX3200 switch consists of the following components 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet ports some or all of which are enabled for Power over Ethernet PoE Uplink module ports SFP SFP or XFP ports The uplink module is an optional feature LCD panel and the LCD navigation buttons Chassis status LEDs Network port LEDs Figure 1 on page 8 shows the front panel of an EX3200 switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet ports Figure 2 on page 8 shows the front panel of an EX3200 switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet ports Models are available that have either all ports equipped for Power over Ethernet PoE or only 8 ports equipped for PoE All ports have 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet connectors Figure 1 EX3200 Switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet Ports LCD buttons LCD panel and LEDs o S 9020081 L Network ports Uplink module Figure 2 EX3200 Switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet Ports LCD panel Menu button A LEDs dim
41. Switch m 39 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches master boot record See the documentation for your USB flash drive for information on how your USB flash drive is formatted Related Topics m See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch for port location m See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 for port location m See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 for port location m See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine SRE Module in an EX8208 Switch for port location m See Routing Engine RE Module in an EX8216 Switch for port location m Booting an EX Series Switch Using a Software Package Stored on a USB Flash Drive Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch A network port on an EX5200 or EX4200 switch uses an RJ 45 connector to connect to a device The port uses an autosensing RJ 45 connector to support a 10 100 1000Base T connection Two LEDs on the port indicate link activity on the port and the port status See Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 20 Table 15 on page 40 provides the pinout information for the RJ 45 connector An RJ 45 cable with a connector attached is supplied with the switch Table 15 Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Pin Signal Description 1 TRP1 Transmit receive data pair 1 Negative Vport in PoE models 2 TRP1 Transmit receive data pair 1
42. Topics m Rack Requirements for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 87 Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 89 m General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 85 92 1H Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 5 Mounting and Clearance Requirements m Rack Mounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 221 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch on page 31 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 32 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 93 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 94 1H Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 6 Cable Specifications m Network Cable Specifications for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 95 Network Cable Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches EX5200 and EX4200 switches have interfaces that use various types of network cables For instructions on connecting an EX5200 or EX4200 switch to a network for out of band management using an Ethernet cable with an RJ 45 connector see Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Management on page 152 For instructions on connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 switch to a management console using an Ethernet cable with an RJ 45 connector see Connecting an EX Serie
43. after it has been interconnected through its uplink VCP to an existing member switch Prepared an existing member switch to interconnect with the new switch through an uplink module port by configuring an uplink module port as a VCP on the existing member switch Ensured that the operational modes of the uplink modules on the existing member switch and the new member switch match Confirmed that the new member switch is powered off Interconnected the existing switch with the new switch using the appropriate cable If these conditions are not met autoprovisioning will not work and you will need to manually configure uplink module ports on the switch to be added to the configuration to be VCPs For more information see Setting an Uplink Module Port as a Virtual Chassis Port CLI Procedure 108 1H Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis Configuration Using Autoprovisioning Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis To add a switch to an existing preprovisioned Virtual Chassis configuration using the autoprovisioning feature 1 Power on the new member switch 2 Confirm that the new member switch is now included in the Virtual Chassis configuration by checking the front panel display for the member ID It should display a member ID in the range from 0 through 9 because there was already at least one member of the Virtual Chassis configuration The member ID is automatically assigned to the new member switch s
44. an SFP or SFP transceiver is installed in an SFP uplink module is down on page 192 The interface on one of the last four built in network ports in an EX3200 switch for example interface ge 0 0 23 is down Problem The interface on one of the last four built in ports ge 0 0 20 through ge 0 0 23 on 24 port models or ge 0 0 44 through ge 0 0 47 on 48 port models of an EX3200 switch is down An SFP or SFP uplink module is installed in the switch and a transceiver is installed in one of the ports on the uplink module When you check the status with the CLI command show interfaces ge or with the J Web user interface the disabled port is not listed Cause The last four built in ports use the same ASIC as the SFP uplink module Therefore if you install a transceiver in an SFP or SFP uplink module installed in an EX3200 switch a corresponding base port from the last four built in ports is disabled Solution If you need to use the disabled built in port you must remove the transceiver from the SFP or SFP uplink module Alternatively you can install an XFP uplink module instead of an SFP or SFP uplink module There is no conflict between the built in network ports and the ports on the XFP uplink modules Troubleshooting Network Interfaces on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 191 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP transceiver is installed in an SFP uplin
45. and airflow clearance you can mount 42 switches in a four post rack or a two post rack that has a height of at least 42 U In all cases the rack must meet the strength requirements to support the weight Mounting bracket hole spacing The holes in the mounting brackets are spaced at 1 U 1 75 in or 4 45 cm so that the switch can be mounted in any rack that provides holes spaced at that distance Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 87 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 27 Rack Requirements and Specifications for the Switch continued Rack Requirement Guidelines Rack size and E strength Ensure that the rack complies with one of these standards m A 19 in rack as defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association http www eia org m A600 mm rack as defined in the four part Equipment Engineering EE European telecommunications standard for equipment practice document numbers ETS 500 119 1 through 119 4 published by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute http www etsi org The horizontal spacing between the rails in a rack that complies with this standard is usually wider than the switch s mounting brackets which measure 19 in 48 2 cm from outer edge to outer edge Use approved wing devices to narrow the opening between the rails as required m
46. and logic power and 48 51 V or higher to compensate for voltage drops along the path from the power supplies to the RJ 45 connector for PoE ports The AC power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is available in 320 W 600 W and 950 W models The exterior of the 600 W model is identical to that of the 950 W model The 520 W power supply is flush with the chassis The 600 W power supply and 950 W power supply extend out of the chassis by 2 25 in The power cord retainer clips extend out of the power supply by 3 in The number of ports on which PoE is enabled determines the minimum power requirements The DC power supply in EX5200 and EX4200 switches is available in a 190 W model with dual input feeds for power resiliency You can install redundant DC power supplies in an EX4200 switch to achieve both power supply and power feed resiliency NOTE The DC power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches does not support Power over Ethernet PoE you can use either an external power injector or an AC power supply to supply power to PoE devices that you connect to the switch NOTE The DC power supply in EX5200 and EX4200 switches has four terminals labeled A B A and B see Figure 19 on page 27 for connecting DC power source cables labeled positive and negative The DC power supplies for EX3200 and EX4200 switches are shipped with jumpers from A input to B input tied together and jumpers from A input to B input tied together
47. certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to connect the equipment to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches Chapter 21 Compliance Information CAUTION Users should not attempt to make electrical ground connections by themselves but should contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician as appropriate Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone l
48. configured as VCPs to form a Virtual Chassis All EX4200 switch models support Virtual Chassis and you can interconnect different models offering a range of port configurations within the same Virtual Chassis The Virtual Chassis configuration includes designation of a master switch and a backup switch with all other switches in the configuration designated as line card role switches Virtual Chassis operation is managed through the master switch Each switch in the Virtual Chassis is assigned a unique identifier that is displayed on the switch LCD m Understanding Virtual Chassis Components m Planning the Virtual Chassis on page 102 m Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 74 m Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches on page 103 Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch m 101 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Planning the Virtual Chassis 102 m Before installing EX4200 switches in a Virtual Chassis configuration you must consider the following factors The number of switches in the Virtual Chassis and location You can interconnect two to ten EX4200 switches to form a Virtual Chassis You can stack the switches in a single rack or install them on multiple racks For information on the size and strength of racks see Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 87 See Chassis Physi
49. disable any specified parameters that conflict with the Virtual Chassis parameters or assigned member configuration 5 Use the CLI or the J Web interface to set the uplink module ports as VCPs a NOTE If you are using a nonprovisioned configuration you might configure the new member switch with a mastership priority value that is less than that of the existing member switches Doing so ensures that the new member switch will function in a linecard role when it is included within the Virtual Chassis configuration 4 Power off the new switch 5 Interconnect the new member switch to at least one member of the existing Virtual Chassis configuration using the uplink module ports on each of the switches that have been configured as VCPs 6 Power on the new member switch 7 Confirm that the new member switch is now included within the Virtual Chassis configuration by checking the front panel display for the member ID It should display a member ID that is higher than O 1 through 9 because there is already at least one member of the Virtual Chassis configuration Adding a New Switch from a Different Wiring Closet to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration m 107 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches CS NOTE If you are using a preprovisioned configuration the member ID is automatically assigned to the member s serial number in the configuration file Adding a New Switch to an Existing Prepr
50. down automatically and the temperature shutdown LED on the rear panel is lit You can see the status of fans and the temperature from the Show Environment Status option in the Status menu in the LCD panel Related Topics m L L a Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 236 Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 132 Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174 Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches EX3200 and EX4200 switches support three types of uplink modules SFP uplink module Provides four ports for 1 gigabit small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers SFP uplink module Provides two ports for 10 gigabit small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers when configured to operate in 10 gigabit mode Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches MW 33 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches or four ports for 1 gigabit small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers when configured to operate in 1 gigabit mode m XFP uplink module Provides two ports for 10 gigabit small form factor pluggable XFP transceivers NOTE When a new uplink module is installed in the switch or an existing uplink module is replaced with another uplink module the switch detects the newly installed uplink module The switch cr
51. el haz ni observarlo directamente con instrumentos pticos Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches m 215 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches A WARNING Varning Rikta inte blicken in mot str len och titta inte direkt p den genom optiska instrument Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches on page 216 m Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches on page 219 m Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 m Optical Interface Support in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 45 m Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches m Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches A WARNING Because invisible radiation might be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable is connected avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare into open apertures LS WARNING Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de poort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is dient blootstelling aan straling en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden WARNING Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua n kym t nt s teily kun kuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettyn v lt s teilylle altistumista l k kat
52. fire extinguisher which uses noncorrosive fire retardants to extinguish the fire Fire Safety Requirements for EX Series Switches Chapter 17 General Safety Information Fire Suppression Equipment Type C fire extinguishers which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide and Halotron are most effective for suppressing electrical fires Type C fire extinguishers displace oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate the fire For extinguishing fire on or around equipment that draws air from the environment for cooling you should use this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher instead of an extinguisher that leaves residues on equipment Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers dry chemical fire extinguishers The primary ingredient in these fire extinguishers is monoammonium phosphate which is very sticky and difficult to clean In addition in the presence of minute amounts of moisture monoammonium phosphate can become highly corrosive and corrodes most metals Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is subject to premature failure and unreliable operation The equipment is considered to be irreparably damaged NOTE To keep warranties effective do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks switch If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is used the unit is no longer eligible for coverage under a ser
53. in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose 3 Remove the cable connected to the transceiver see Disconnecting a Fiber Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch on page 179 Cover the transceiver and the end of each fiber optic cable connector with a rubber safety cap immediately after disconnecting the fiber optic cables 4 Using your fingers pull the ejector lever on the transceiver to unlock the transceiver CAUTION Before removing the transceiver make sure you open the ejector lever completely until you hear it click This prevents damage to the transceiver 5 Using the needlenose pliers pull the ejector lever out from the transceiver Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components 6 Grasp the transceiver ejector lever and gently slide the transceiver approximately 0 5 in 1 5 cm straight out of the port A CAUTION To avoid electrostatic discharge ESD damage to the transceiver do not touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver 7 Using your fingers grasp the body of the transceiver and pull it straight out of the port 8 Place the transceiver in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed ona flat stable surface 9 Place the dust cover over the empty port Figure 72 Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch 9040051 Ejector SFP lever transceiver Related Topics m Installing a Transc
54. in equipment which Customer purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller Software also includes updates upgrades and new releases of such software Embedded Software means Software which Juniper has embedded in or loaded onto the Juniper equipment and any updates upgrades additions or replacements which are subsequently embedded in or loaded onto the equipment 5 License Grant Subject to payment of the applicable fees and the limitations and restrictions set forth herein Juniper grants to Customer a non exclusive and non transferable license without right to sublicense to use the Software in executable form only subject to the following use restrictions a Customer shall use Embedded Software solely as embedded in and for execution on Juniper equipment originally purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller b Customer shall use the Software on a single hardware chassis having a single processing unit or as many chassis or processing units for which Customer has paid the applicable license fees provided however with respect to the Steel Belted Radius or Odyssey Access Client software only Customer shall use such Software on a single computer containing a single physical random access memory space and containing any number of processors Use of the Steel Belted Radius or IMS AAA software on multiple computers or virtual machines e g Solaris zones requires multiple licenses regardless of whether
55. into the port ensure the transceiver is aligned correctly Misalignment might cause the pins to bend making the transceiver unusable 5 Slide the transceiver in gently until it is fully seated 6 Remove the rubber safety cap when you are ready to connect the cable to the transceiver EN WARNING Do not look directly into a fiber optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber optic cables Fiber optic transceivers and fiber optic cables connected to transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes Figure 50 Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch 9040050 SFP transceiver Related Topics m Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 m Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch on page 159 m Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches m Optical Interface Support in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 45 m Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch EX4200 switches have two Virtual Chassis ports on the rear panel You can use the Virtual Chassis ports to interconnect up to 10 EX4200 switches enabling them to operate as a unified single high bandwidth switch To see illustrations of a few Virtual Chassis cabling configuration examples see Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches on page 105 Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch M 137 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 E
56. lists the EX3200 switch models Table 1 EX3200 Switch Models Number of PoE enabled Power Supply Model Typical Deployment Access Ports Ports Minimum EX5200 24T Access or Distribution 24 Gigabit Etherne First 8 ports 320 W switch EX3200 24P Access switch 24 Gigabit Etherne All 24 ports 600 W EX3200 48T Access or Distribution 48 Gigabit Etherne First 8 ports 320 W switch EX3200 48P Access switch 48 Gigabit Etherne All 48 ports 930 W Related Topics EX4200 Switch Models on page 6 Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 3 EX4200 Switch Models The EX4200 switch is available with 24 or 48 ports and with partial or full Power over Ethernet PoE capability Table 2 on page 6 lists the EX4200 switch models Table 2 EX4200 Switch Models Power Supply Model Ports Number of PoE enabled Ports Minimum EX4200 24T 24 Gigabit Ethernet First 8 ports 320 W EX4200 24P 24 Gigabit Ethernet All 24 ports 600 W EX4200 48T 48 Gigabit Ethernet First 8 ports 320 W EX4200 48P 48 Gigabit Ethernet All 48 ports 930 W EX4200 24F 24 small form factor pluggable Not applicable 320 W SFP transceivers 6 W EX3200 Switch Models Related Topics Chapter 1 EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview EX5200 Switch Models on page 6 Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 10 Rear Pa
57. meets the requirements described in Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 81 m Place the rack in its permanent location allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance and secure it to the building structure 118 Mm Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet Chapter 9 Installing the Switch m Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 with particular attention to Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 220 m Remove the switch from the shipping carton see Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 114 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to mount the switch on two posts in a rack m Phillips screwdriver number 2 m 2 mounting brackets and 8 mounting screws provided in the accessory box shipped with the switch m Screws to secure the chassis to the rack not provided m 2 in recess front brackets if you will mount the switch in a recessed position brackets are from the separately orderable four post rack mount kit m Dust covers for ports for EX4200 24F switches only optional Ss NOTE One person must be available to lift the switch while another secures the switch to the rack A CAUTION If you are mounting multiple switches on a rack mount a switch in the bottom of the rack first and proceed to mount the rest of the switches from botto
58. module ge 0 1 3 then ge 0 0 23 is disabled The disabled port is not listed in the output of show interface commands The SFP uplink module requires JUNOS Software for EX Series switches Release 9 0 or later SFP Uplink Module SFP uplink modules can be used for either SFP or SFP transceivers You configure the operating mode on the module to match the type of transceiver you want to use for SFP transceivers you configure the 10 gigabit operating mode and for SFP transceivers you configure the 1 gigabit operating mode See Setting the Mode on an SFP Uplink Module CLI Procedure on page 168 By default the SFP uplink module operates in the 10 gigabit mode and supports only SFP transceivers If you have not changed the module from the default setting and you want to use SFP transceivers you do not need to configure the operating mode If the operating mode and the configured mode for an SFP uplink module are different it is shown in the output of show chassis pic fpc slot slot number pic slot 1 Figure 25 on page 35 shows the SFP uplink module Figure 25 SFP Uplink Module MSS AA E 9020123 Operating mode LED Link Activity Status LED LED Transceivers are supported in the uplink module s ports as follows m SFP transceivers are supported in ports O and 2 Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches M 35 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches
59. must provide the USB to DB 9 male adapter Pin Signal Description 1 RTS Output Request to send 2 DTR Output Data terminal ready 3 TxD Output Transmit data 4 Signal Ground Signal ground 5 Signal Ground Signal ground 6 RxD Input Receive data 7 CD Input Data carrier detect 8 CTS Input Clear to send Related Topics m See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch for port location m See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 for port location m See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 for port location Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch m 41 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches m See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine SRE Module in an EX8208 Switch for port location m See Routing Engine RE Module in an EX8216 Switch for port location m Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 153 Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch The management port on an EX3200 or EX4200 switch uses an RJ 45 connector to connect to a management device for out of band management The port uses an autosensing RJ 45 connector to support a 10 100 1000Base T connection Two LEDs on the port indicate link activity on the port and the administrative status of the port See Management Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 24 Table 17 on page 42 provides the pinout information of the
60. of power supply or add a new type of uplink module It does not apply if you replace these components with the same type of component Related Topics m Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 172 m Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 m AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 98 Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch MW 132 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches m Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 m Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch EX3200 and EX4200 switches have a single field replaceable unit FRU fan tray on the rear panel The fan tray is a hot removable and hot insertable FRU You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions Before you begin installing a fan tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install a fan tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch chassis m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap m Phillips screwdriver numb
61. or regulations or without all necessary approvals Customer shall be liable for any such violations The version of the Software supplied to Customer may contain encryption or other capabilities restricting Customer s ability to export the Software without an export license 12 Commercial Computer Software The Software is commercial computer software and is provided with restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in DFARS 227 7201 through 227 7202 4 FAR 12 212 FAR 27 405 b 2 FAR 52 227 19 or FAR 52 227 14 ALT III as applicable 15 Interface Information To the extent required by applicable law and at Customer s written request Juniper shall provide Customer with the interface information needed to achieve interoperability between the Software and another independently created program on payment of applicable fee if any Customer shall observe strict obligations of confidentiality with respect to such information and shall use such information in compliance with any applicable terms and conditions upon which Juniper makes such information available 14 Third Party Software Any licensor of Juniper whose software is embedded in the Software and any supplier of Juniper whose products or technology are embedded in or services are accessed by the Software shall be a third party beneficiary with respect to this Agreement and such li
62. serial number in the configuration file Related Topics m Example Expanding a Virtual Chassis Configuration in a Single Wiring Closet m Example Setting Up a Multimember Virtual Chassis Access Switch with a Default Configuration a Example Configuring a Virtual Chassis Interconnected Across Multiple Wiring Closets m Example Configuring a Virtual Chassis Using a Preprovisioned Configuration File a Example Configuring Automatic Software Update on Virtual Chassis Member Switches a Monitoring Virtual Chassis Configuration Status and Statistics m Replacing a Member Switch of a Virtual Chassis Configuration CLI Procedure on page 182 m Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis Configuration Using Autoprovisioning m 109 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 110 1m Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis Configuration Using Autoprovisioning Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components m Installing the Switch on page 115 m Installing Switch Components on page 129 m Connecting the Switch on page 141 m Performing Initial Configuration on page 161 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components m 111 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 112 Mm Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components Chapter 9
63. site General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches m 83 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches A WARNING It is particularly important to provide a properly grounded and shielded environment and to use electrical surge suppression devices Table 25 Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines Site Wiring Factor Guidelines Signaling limitations If your site experiences any of the following problems consult experts in electrical surge suppression and shielding Improperly installed wires cause radio frequency interference RFI Damage from lightning strikes occurs when wires exceed recommended distances or pass between buildings Electromagnetic pulses EMPs caused by lightning damages unshielded conductors and electronic devices Radio frequency interference To reduce or eliminate radio frequency interference RFI from your site wiring do the following Use twisted pair cable with a good distribution of grounding conductors If you must exceed the recommended distances use a high quality twisted pair cable with one ground conductor for each data signal when applicable Electromagnetic compatibility If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility EMC particularly from lightning or radio transmitters seek expert advice Some of the problems caused by strong sources of electromagnetic interference EMI are Destruction of the signal dri
64. such computers or virtualizations are physically contained on a single chassis C Product purchase documents paper or electronic user documentation and or the particular licenses purchased by Customer may specify limits to Customer s use of the Software Such limits may restrict use to a maximum number of seats registered endpoints concurrent users sessions calls connections subscribers clusters nodes realms devices links ports or transactions or require the purchase of separate licenses to use particular features functionalities services applications operations or capabilities or provide throughput performance configuration bandwidth interface processing temporal or geographical limits In addition such limits may restrict the use of the Software to managing certain kinds of networks or require the Software to be used only in conjunction with other specific Software Customer s use of the Software shall be subject to all such limitations and purchase of all applicable licenses d For any trial copy of the Software Customer s right to use the Software expires 30 days after download installation or use of the Software Customer may operate the Software after the 50 day trial period only if Customer pays for a license to do so Customer may not extend or create an additional trial period by re installing the Software after the 50 day trial period e The Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel Belted Radius software may be us
65. switch chassis m If you are mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 switch on a rack or cabinet with other equipment or if you are placing it on the desktop or floor near other equipment ensure that the exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the chassis m Leave at least 24 in 61 cm both in front of and behind the EX3200 or EX4200 switch For service personnel to remove and install hardware components you must leave adequate space at the front and back of the switch NEBS GR 65 recommends that you allow at least 50 in 76 2 cm in front of the rack or cabinet and 24 in 61 cm behind the rack or cabinet Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 91 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Figure 28 Airflow Through the EX3200 Switch Chassis Front Q ot III Rear Figure 29 Airflow Through the EX4200 Switch Chassis Front Oli IBI us a n on 0g ua aa d EE 020100 Related
66. the configuration takes effect you might lose connectivity between the PC and the switch To renew the connection release and renew the IP address by executing the appropriate commands on the management PC or by removing and reinserting the Ethernet cable Related Topics m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 m Installing and Connecting an EX2200 Switch m Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 113 m Installing and Connecting an EX8208 Switch m Installing and Connecting an EX8216 Switch Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure m 165 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Configuring the LCD Panel Display on EX Series Switches CLI Procedure The LCD panel on the front panel of EX Series switches shows two lines of text each a maximum of 16 characters in length The LCD panel displays a variety of information about the switch and also provides a menu to perform basic operations such as initial setup and reboot This topic describes 1 Disabling the Maintenance Menu on page 166 2 Enabling the Maintenance Menu on page 166 5 Configuring a Custom Display Message on page 167 Disabling the Maintenance Menu By default the Maintenance menu in the LCD panel on an EX Series switch is enabled Users can configure and troubleshoot the switch using the options in the Maintenance menu If you do not want users to be able to
67. the machine s domain name edit root set system domain name domain name Plain text like this Represents names of configuration statements commands files and directories IP addresses configuration hierarchy levels or labels on routing platform components m Toconfigure a stub area include the stub statement at the edit protocols ospf area area id hierarchy level m The console port is labeled CONSOLE angle brackets Enclose optional keywords or variables stub default metric metric pipe symbol Indicates a choice between the mutually exclusive keywords or variables on either side of the symbol The set of choices is often enclosed in parentheses for clarity broadcast multicast string1 string2 string3 pound sign Indicates a comment specified on the same line as the configuration statement to which it applies rsvp Required for dynamic MPLS only square brackets Enclose a variable for which you can substitute one or more values community name members community ids Indention and braces Identify a level in the configuration hierarchy edit routing options static route default nexthop address retain semicolon Identifies a leaf statement at a configuration hierarchy level J Web GUI Conventions Bold text like this Represents J Web graphical user interface GUI item
68. the new member switch If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration edited the existing Virtual Chassis configuration to include the serial number of the new member switch Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration CLI Procedure m 105 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches You can specify the role of the new member switch when you add its serial number in the Virtual Chassis configuration file The parameters specified in the master Virtual Chassis configuration file are applied after the new member switch has been interconnected to an existing member switch NOTE After you have created a preprovisioned Virtual Chassis configuration you can use the autoprovisioning feature to add member switches to that configuration To add a new member switch to an existing Virtual Chassis configuration within the same wiring closet 1 Ifthe new member switch has been previously configured revert that switch s configuration to the factory defaults See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch 2 Interconnect the unpowered new switch to at least one member of the existing Virtual Chassis configuration using the dedicated Virtual Chassis ports VCPs 5 Power on the new switch 4 Confirm that the new member switch is now included within the Virtual Chassis configuration by checking the front panel display for the member ID It should display a member
69. the switch Figure 59 Ethernet Cable Connector e D To connect an EX Series switch to a network for out of band management see Figure 60 on page 153 g001063 1 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the management port labeled MGMT on the EX Series switch For the location of the MGMT port on different EX Series switches m See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch m See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 m See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 m See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine SRE Module in an EX8208 Switch m See Routing Engine RE Module in an EX8216 Switch 2 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the management device Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Management Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch Figure 60 Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Management Management PC To Management port on the switch Management PC Management network 9020548 Related Topics m Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 155 m Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX2200 Switch m Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 42 m Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX8200 Switch m Cables Connecting the EX8200 Switch to Management Devices Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console You can co
70. you begin removing a fan tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove a fan tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch chassis m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap m Phillips screwdriver number 2 m An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat To remove a fan tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch see Figure 68 on page 175 and Figure 69 on page 175 1 Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 2 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis 5 Loosen the screw or screws securing the fan tray by using the Phillips screwdriver number 2 WARNING To avoid injury do not touch the fan with your hands or any tools as you slide the fan tray out of the chassis the fan may still be running 4 Grasp the handle on the fan tray and pull firmly to slide the fan tray halfway out of the chassis 5 When the fan stops spinning slide the fan tray completely out of the chassis 6 Place the fan tray in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat stable surface Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components Figure 68 Rem
71. 0 Switch on page 9 m Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch If your EX3200 or EX4200 switch includes an optional field replaceable unit FRU uplink module you install it in the switch s front panel The different types of uplink modules are described in Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 55 The uplink module in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is a hot removable and hot insertable FRU You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions Ce NOTE If you have set an uplink module port as a Virtual Chassis port VCP removing the uplink module breaks the setting You must reset the port as a VCP after you replace the module See Setting an Uplink Module Port as a Virtual Chassis Port CLI Procedure Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch m 133 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 134 m NOTE On an EX5200 switch if you install a transceiver in an SFP uplink module or in an SFP uplink module when the SFP uplink module is operating in the 1 gigabit mode a corresponding network port from the last four built in ports is disabled For example if you install an SFP or SFP transceiver in port 2 on the uplink module ge 0 1 3 then ge 0 0 23 is disabled The disabled port is not listed in the output of show interface commands When an SFP uplink module is ope
72. 0 Switches on page 30 m Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 m Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 m Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 m Power Specifications for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 97 m Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 m Connecting AC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 m Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches The AC power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is on the rear panel Table 15 on page 29 describes the LEDs on the AC power supplies in EX3200 and EX4200 switches Table 13 AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches LED State and Description AC OK m Off Disconnected from power or power is not coming into the power supply m On Power is coming into the power supply DC OK m Off Power supply is not sending out power correctly m On Power supply is sending out power correctly AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 29 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches D NOTE If the AC OK LED and the DC OK LED are unlit either the AC power cord is not installed properly or the power supply fuse has failed If the AC OK LED is lit and the DC OK LED is unlit the AC power supply is not installed properly or the po
73. 1 2001 Safety of Information Technology Equipment EN 60825 1 Safety of Laser Products Part 1 Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide EMC FCC 47CFR Part 15 Class A USA EN 55022 Class A Emissions Europe ICES 005 Class A VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS CISPR 22 Class A Australia New Zealand CISPR 22 Class A EN 55024 EN 300386 EN 61000 3 2 Power Line Harmonics EN 61000 3 3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker EN 61000 4 2 ESD EN 61000 4 3 Radiated Immunity EN 61000 4 4 EFT Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches m 253 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics m EN 61000 4 5 Surge EN 61000 4 6 Low Frequency Common Immunity m EN 61000 4 11 Voltage Dips and Sags m Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 254 m Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 256 Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches Canada 254 m This topic describes the EMC requirements for EX Series switches for m Canada on page 254 m European Community on page 255 m Japan on page 255 m United States on page 255 m FCC Part 15 Statement on page 255 m Non Regulatory Environmental Standards on page 256 This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 005 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 005 du Canada The Industry Canada label identifies
74. 10 seconds the interfaces on the uplink module might not come up 3 Taking care not to touch module components pins leads or solder connections remove the uplink module from its bag Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chapter 10 Installing Switch Components A CAUTION Before you slide the uplink module into the slot on the switch chassis ensure the uplink module is aligned correctly Misalignment might cause the pins to bend making the uplink module unusable 4 Using both hands place the module in the empty slot and slide it in gently until it is fully seated 5 Flip the door down and tighten the screws by using the cross head screwdriver D NOTE If the switch does not detect the uplink module see Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 192 Figure 49 Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 9020098 D NOTE If you have a Juniper J Care service contract register any addition change or upgrade of hardware components at https www juniper net customers csc management updateinstallbase jsp Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts This note applies if you change the type of power supply or add a new type of uplink module It does not apply if you replace these components with the same type of component Related Topics m Troubleshooting Uplink M
75. 10GE LRM Rate 10 Gbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Minimum Launch Power 6 5 dBm Maximum Launch Power 0 5 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 21 dBm Maximum Input Power 0 5 dBm Fiber Type MMF Core Cladding Size 625125um 50 125gm 50 125 um Fiber Grade FDDI OM1 OM2 OM3 Modal Bandwidth 500 500 500 MHz km MHz km MHz km Distance 220m 220m 220m 722 ft 722 ft 722 ft DOM Support Available 62 1H Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 20 Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 10GBase LR Model Number EX SFP 10GE LR Rate 10 Gbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Minimum Launch Power 8 2 dBm Maximum Launch Power 0 5 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 18 dBm Maximum Input Power 0 5 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 10 km 6 2 miles DOM Support Available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 63 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 21 Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Ethernet Standard Specifications 10GBase SR Model Number EX XF
76. 187 Part 6 Troubleshooting Switch Components Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Switch Components 191 Troubleshooting Network Interfaces on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 191 The interface on one of the last four built in network ports in an EX3200 switch for example interface ge 0 0 25 is down osere 191 The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP transceiver is installed in an SFP uplink module is down s 192 Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200 SWITCHES Ekel dtes euge eege 192 Virtual Chassis port VCP connection does not work a se 192 One of the last four network ports on an EX3200 switch with an SFP or SFP uplink module installed is disabled sssssssssssss 195 Part 7 Returning Hardware Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components 197 Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement cere de o A n ett e at re dg ce e Ded Stats 197 Locating the Serial Number on an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch or COMPONEN EE 198 Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI 198 Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX5200 or EX4200 SWITCHES dietis ret as foe st eoe oti anther tule tias 198 Table of Contents W Xi Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Part 8 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 xii Table of Contents Locating the Serial Number ID Labels o
77. 2 Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 133 Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch 0 2 00 eee etter 156 Table of Contents W ix Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Part 4 Chapter 13 x Table of Contents Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch 157 Connecting the Switch 141 Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch 141 Connecting Earth Ground to an EX2200 or EX5200 Switch 142 Connecting Earth Ground to an EX4200 Switch secese 142 Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8208 Switch 144 Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8216 Switch 145 Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch essees 146 Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch eccess 148 Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Mariagermento cune e eked tdeo ipte m CE Pd eget Sie he 152 Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console ceene 155 Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Modem ssessssssssrerirrrrisesreeerrrre 155 Setting the Serial Console Speed for the Switch 155 Configuring the Modem ces etre dr ee doge e pe Ee eei c edad 156 Connecting the Modem to the Console Port 157 Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch s 159 Performing Initial Configuration 161 Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure 161 Connecting and Configur
78. 2 STX26N E15 STX25P E14 SGMIITXN E15 Uplink_Hotswap_LED E16 Uplink_Spare_Intr E17 Uplink_Status_LED1 E18 Uplink_P27_LEDO E19 POWER 12V E20 POWER 12V F1 GND F2 XAUIO_TXOP F3 GND F4 XAUIO_TX2P F5 GND F6 XAUI1_TXOP F7 GND F8 XAUI TX2P Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches W 71 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 22 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Pin Number Pin Name F9 GND F10 STX28P F11 GND F12 STX26P F15 GND F14 SGMIITXP F15 GND F16 Uplink_Expander_Intr F17 GND F18 Uplink_P27_LED1 F19 GND F20 POWER 12V G1 GND G2 GND G3 XAUIO_RX1N G4 GND G5 XAUIO_RX3N G6 GND G7 XAUIM_RXIN G8 GND G9 XAUI1_RX3N G10 GND G11 SRX27N G12 GND G15 SRX25N G14 GND G15 GND 72 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Table 22 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Chapter 3 Component Specifications Pin Number Pin Name G16 GND G17 Uplink_P25_LEDO G18 GND G19 POWER 12V G20 GND H1 Uplink_PD_Loopback H2 GND H5 XAUIO_RX1P H4 GND H5 XAUIO_RX3P H6 Uplink_P26_ LED2 H7 XAUI1_RX1P H8 Up
79. 200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface on page 117 using the rubber feet provided Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall on page 125 using the separately orderable wall mount kit Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch m 113 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics m Follow instructions in Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 Follow instructions for connecting power as appropriate for your site m Connecting AC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 m Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 Perform initial configuration of the switch by following instructions in Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 or Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 Set the switch s management options by following the appropriate instructions m Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Management on page 152 m Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 155 Rack Requirements for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 87 Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 89 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 114 m The EX5200 and EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses the
80. 200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches After locating the serial number of the switch or hardware component you want to return open a Case with Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC on the Web or by telephone For instructions on locating the serial number of the switch or hardware component you want to return m See Locating the Serial Number on an EX2200 Switch or Component m See Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component on page 198 m See Locating the Serial Number on an EX8200 Switch or Component Before you request an RMA from JTAC be prepared to provide the following information m Your existing case number if you have one m Serial number of the component m Your name organization name telephone number fax number and shipping address m Details of the failure or problem m Type of activity being performed on the switch when the problem occurred Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day seven days a week on the Web or by telephone m Case Manager at CSC http www juniper net cm m Telephone 1 888 314 JTAC1 888 3 14 5822 toll free in U S Canada and Mexico NOTE For international or direct dial options in countries without toll free numbers see http www juniper net support requesting support html Related Topics If you are contacting JTAC by telephone enter your 1 1 digit case number followed by the
81. 200 and EX4200 Switches mm 225 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches A WARNING Avertissement lorsqu install en position verticale un chassis de commutation EX5200 ou EX4200 doit tre orient avec le panneau avant dirig vers le bas A Related Topics WARNING Warnhinweis Bei der Befestigung in vertikaler Position muss ein EX3200 oder EX4200 Switch Gehause so ausgerichtet werden dass das vordere Bedienfeld des Switch Geh uses nach unten zeigt Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall on page 125 Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches 226 m A WARNING The switch is intended to be grounded During normal use ensure that you have connected earth ground to the switch chassis Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host computer tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden Varoitus T m laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi Varmista ett is nt laite on yhdistetty maahan normaalik yt n aikana Attention Cet quipement doit tre reli la terre S assurer que l appareil h te est reli la terre lors de l utilisation normale Warnung Dieses Ger t mu geerdet werden Stellen Sie sicher da das Host Ger t wahrend des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa Accertarsi che il dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale ut
82. 3200 and EX4200 switches are m Power supply m Fan tray m Uplink module m SFP transceiver m SFP transceiver m XFP transceiver The power supply fan tray uplink module and transceivers are hot removable and hot insertable You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions To install a power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 130 To remove a power supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 172 To install a fan tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 132 To remove a fan tray from Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components WM 171 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Removing a Fan Tray from an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174 To install an uplink module in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 155 To remove an uplink module from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 175 To install an SFP SFP or XFP transceiver in an E
83. 7 with particular attention to Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 220 Remove the switch from the shipping carton see Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 114 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to mount the switch on a wall Phillips screwdriver number 2 2 wall mount brackets provided with the wall mount kit 12 wall mount bracket screws provided with the wall mount kit 4 mounting screws 8 32 x 1 25 in or M4 x 30 mm not included Dust covers for ports for EX4200 24F switches only optional Hollow wall anchors capable of supporting the combined weight of two fully loaded switches up to 44 Ib 20 kg not included if you are mounting the switch in sheetrock wall board with a gypsum plaster core or in wall board not backed by wall studs Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall mM 125 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches A WARNING When mounted in a vertical position an EX3200 or EX4200 switch must be oriented with the front panel of the chassis pointing down in order to ensure proper airflow and meet safety requirements in the event of a fire Ss NOTE For easier lifting install any additional power supplies only after you mount the switch on the wall To mount the switch on a wall 1 Attach the wall mount brackets to the sides of the chassis using four of the wall mount bracket screws on each
84. AR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT DOES JUNIPER WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE OR ANY EQUIPMENT OR NETWORK RUNNING THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE WITHOUT ERROR OR INTERRUPTION OR WILL BE FREE OF VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION OR ATTACK In no event shall Juniper s or its suppliers or licensors liability to Customer whether in contract tort including negligence breach of warranty or otherwise exceed the price paid by Customer for the Software that gave rise to the claim or if the Software is embedded in another Juniper product the price paid by Customer for such other product Customer acknowledges and agrees that Juniper has set its prices and entered into this Agreement in reliance upon the disclaimers of warranty and the limitations of liability set forth herein that the same reflect an allocation of risk between the Parties including the risk that a contract remedy may fail of its essential purpose and cause consequential loss and that the same form an essential basis of the bargain between the Parties 9 Termination Any breach of this Agreement or failure by Customer to pay any applicable fees due shall result in automatic termination of the license granted herein Upon such termination Customer shall destroy or return to Juniper all copies of the Software and related documentation in Customer s possession or control 10 Taxes All license fees payable under this agreement are exclusive of tax Customer shall be responsibl
85. CC En utilisant les crochets appropri s l extr mit de c blage En reliant la puissance l ordre appropri de c blage est rectifi pour rectifier RTN RTN puis 48 V 48 V En d branchant la puissance l ordre appropri de cablage est 48 V 48 V RTN RTN a alors rectifi pour rectifier Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours tre reli d abord et d branch pour la derni re fois Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours tre reli d abord et d branch pour la derni re fois Warnung Die Stromzufuhr ist nur mit geeigneten Ring sen an das DC Netzteil anzuschliessen Die richtige Anschlusssequenz ist Erdanschluss zu Erdanschluss RTN zu RTN und dann 48V zu 48V Die richtige Sequenz zum Abtrennen der Stromversorgung ist 48V zu 48V RTN zu RTN und dann Erdanschluss zu Erdanschluss Es ist zu beachten dass der Erdanschluss immer zuerst angeschlossen und als letztes abgetrennt wird Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC Cablare l alimentatore CC usando i connettori adatti all estremit del cablaggio come illustrato La corretta sequenza di cablaggio da massa a massa da positivo a positivo da linea ad L e da negativo a negativo da neutro a N Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve sempre venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord RTN til RTN 48 V til 48 V Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekven
86. Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Juniper Networks Inc 1194 North Mathilda Avenue Sunnyvale California 94089 USA 408 745 2000 www juniper net Revision 9 Published 2010 02 17 This product includes the Envoy SNMP Engine developed by Epilogue Technology an Integrated Systems Company Copyright 9 1986 1997 Epilogue Technology Corporation All rights reserved This program and its documentation were developed at private expense and no part of them is in the public domain This product includes memory allocation software developed by Mark Moraes copyright 9 1988 1989 1995 University of Toronto This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors All of the documentation and software included in the 4 4BSD and 4 4BSD Lite Releases is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California Copyright 1979 1980 1985 1986 1988 989 1991 1992 1995 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved GateD software copyright 1995 the Regents of the University All rights reserved Gate Daemon was originated and developed through release 5 0 by Cornell University and its collaborators Gated is based on Kirton s EGP UC Berkeley s routing daemon routed and DCN s HELLO routing protocol Development of Gated has been supported in part by the National Science Foundation Portions of the GateD software copyright 9
87. EX SFP 1FE LX Rate 100 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Minimum Launch Power 15 dBm Maximum Launch Power 8 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 51 5 dBm Maximum Input Power 8 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 10 km 6 2 miles DOM Support Not available 56 HW Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 19 Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 100Base BX U Model Number EX SFP FE20KT13R15 Rate 100 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Single Transmitter Wavelength 1310 nm Receiver Wavelength 1550 nm Minimum Launch Power 14 dBm Maximum Launch Power 8 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 45 dBm Maximum Input Power 8 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 20 km 12 4 miles DOM Support Not available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 57 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 19 Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 100Base BX D Model Number EX SFP FE20KT15R13 Rate 100 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Sin
88. EX Series Switches on page 258 DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 227 Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches on page 219 Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 Definitions of Safety Warning Levels for EX Series Switches 208 m The documentation for EX Series switches uses the following levels of safety warnings there are two Warning formats NOTE You might find this information helpful in a particular situation or you might overlook this important information if it was not highlighted in a Note CAUTION You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid minor injury or discomfort to you or severe damage to the EX Series switch WARNING This symbol alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser Definitions of Safety Warning Levels for EX Series Switches Chapter 17 General Safety Information WARNING This symbol means danger You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury Before you work on any equipment be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents WARNING Waarschu
89. Ensure that the rack is one of the following standard lengths n 23 62 in 600 mm a 30 in 762 mm E 21 5 in 546 mm m Ensure that the rack rails are spaced widely enough to accommodate the switch chassis external dimensions of 1 75 in 4 45 cm height 17 5 in 44 5 cm width and 10 5 in 26 7 cm depth The outer edges of the front mounting brackets extend the width to 19 in 48 2 cm The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow for the clearances around the switch and rack The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of the switch Ensure that the spacing of rails and adjacent racks allows for the proper clearance around the switch and rack Rack connection to m Secure the rack to the building structure building structure If earthquakes are a possibility in your geographical area secure the rack to the floor Secure the rack to the ceiling brackets as well as wall or floor brackets for maximum stability 88 m Related Topics One pair of mounting brackets for mounting the switch on two posts is supplied with each switch You can order a four post rack mount kit separately m Chassis Physical Specifications for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 7 m Rack Mounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 221 m Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 m Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Ca
90. Figure 55 Connecting the Grounding Lug to an EX4200 Switch on a Four Post CU qe ETE 144 Figure 54 Connecting the AC Power Cord Retainer Clip to an AC Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch ssssssssse 147 Figure 55 Connecting an AC Power Cord to an AC Power Supply in an EX3200 0r EX4200 Switch iiie innere ee ed deer t dms 148 Figure 56 DC Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 148 Figure 57 Removing the Terminal Block Cover from a DC Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 150 Figure 58 Securing Ring Lugs to the Terminals on the DC Power Supply in an EX3200 0EX4200 SWiteh EE 151 Figure 59 Ethernet Cable Connector obe wade tee des 152 Figure 60 Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Management turca Eti m ots eder ehe lese eeu tata Zeie es 155 Part 4 Part 7 Part 8 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 16 Chapter 20 List of Figures Figure ol Ethernet Cable COnrector ia atris eet notet tee 155 Figure 62 Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console Through a CONSOLE SERVER airis re ete etc Dt et estes 154 Figure 65 Connecting an EX Series Switch Directly to a Management olm 154 Figure 64 Ethernet Cable Connector ete won en ee vede 158 Figure 65 Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver Installed iram EX Seres SWICK n operante dese eae qs 159 Performing Initial Configuration 161 Figure 66 LCD Panel in an EX3200 EX4200 or EX8200 Switch
91. G Warnung Um einen Router der switch vor berhitzung zu sch tzen darf dieser nicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden in der die Umgebungstemperatur das empfohlene Maximum von 40 C berschreitet Um L ftungsverschlu zu verhindern achten Sie darauf da amp mindestens 15 2 cm lichter Raum um die L ftungs ffnungen herum frei bleibt WARNING Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei switch non adoperateli in un locale che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40 C Per evitare che la circolazione dell aria sia impedita lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15 2 cm di fronte alle aperture delle ventole Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches m 231 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches WARNING Advarsel Unnga overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks switch Disse skal ikke brukes pa steder der den anbefalte maksimale omgivelsestemperaturen overstiger 40 C 104 F Serg for at klaringen rundt lufte pningene er minst 15 2 cm 6 tommer for forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon WARNING Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks switch n o utilize este equipamento numa rea que exceda a temperatura m xima recomendada de 40 C Para evitar a restri o circula o de ar deixe pelo menos um espa o de 15 2 cm volta das aberturas de ventila o WARNING jAtenci n Para impedir que un encam
92. ID that is higher than 0 1 through 9 because there is already at least one member of the Virtual Chassis configuration NOTE If you are using a preprovisioned configuration the member ID is automatically assigned to the member s serial number in the configuration file Adding a New Switch from a Different Wiring Closet to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration To add a new switch from a different wiring closet to an existing Virtual Chassis configuration you must use a long cable to connect the new member switch across wiring closets You can use a port on an SFP SFP or XFP uplink module or an SFP network port on an EX4200 24F switch and a fiber optic cable for this purpose Before you begin be sure you have m Installed the uplink modules needed for the Virtual Chassis configuration m Mounted the new switch in a rack m Ifthe new member switch has been previously configured reverted its configuration to the factory defaults See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch m Powered on the new member switch as a standalone switch and configured its uplink module ports as VCPs Otherwise it cannot be recognized as a member switch by the master 106 1H Adding a New Switch from a Different Wiring Closet to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis m If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration made a note of the serial number on the back
93. Networks switch dever ser instalado numa prateleira fixa estrutura do edificio m Esta unidade dever ser montada na parte inferior da estante caso seja esta a nica unidade a ser montada m Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada coloque os itens mais pesados na parte inferior da estante arrumando os de baixo para cima m Seaestante possuir um dispositivo de estabiliza o instale o antes de montar ou reparar a unidade A WARNING jAtencion Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un bastidor o posteriormente durante su mantenimiento se debe poner mucho cuidado en que el sistema quede bien estable Para garantizar su seguridad proceda segun las siguientes instrucciones m El Juniper Networks switch debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura del edificio m Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor cuando sea la unica unidad en el mismo 224 m RackMounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado comenzar la instalaci n desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el equipo m s pesado en la parte inferior Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores instalar stos antes de montar o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor A WARNING Varning For att undvika
94. ORDES CT 16087 ER UU CAESUS 9017253 Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 240 m Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch m Connecting AC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 m Connecting AC Power to an EX8200 Switch AC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches A WARNING Before working on the switch or near power supplies unplug all the power cords from an AC switch Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto ennen kuin teet mitaan asennuspohjalle tai ty skentelet virtalahteiden l heisyydess Attention Avant de travailler sur un chassis ou proximit d une alimentation lectrique d brancher le cordon d alimentation des unit s en courant alternatif Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der N he von Netzger ten arbeiten ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori scollegare il cavo di alimentazione sulle unit CA AC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches MW 239 Complete Hardwar
95. P the port is reset to an uplink module port or an EX4200 24F network port For information on how to use the REQUEST VC PORT option see Setting an Uplink Module Port or an EX4200 24F Network Port as a Virtual Chassis Port Using the LCD Panel m FACTORY DEFAULT Select this option using the Enter button to restore the switch to the factory default configuration Press the Enter button again to confirm the restoration Press the Menu button to go to he next option in the Maintenance menu m ENTER EZSETUP Select this option using the Enter button to launch EZSetup Press the Enter button again to confirm the launch Press the Menu button to go to the next option in the Maintenance menu You can use the ENTER EZSETUP option only if the switch is in the factory default configuration For information about EZSetup see Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 m EXIT MAINT MENU Select this option to exit the Maintenance menu You can disable the Maintenance menu in the LCD panel See Configuring the LCD Panel Display on EX Series Switches CLI Procedure on page 166 Related Topics m Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 m Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 10 m Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web
96. P 10GE SR Rate 10 Gbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 850 nm Minimum Launch Power 7 5 dBm Maximum Launch Power 1 5 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 11 1 dBm Maximum Input Power 1 dBm Fiber Type MMF Core Cladding Size 62 5 125 62 5 125 50 125 50 125 50 125 um um um um um Fiber Grade FDDI OMI OM2 OM3 Modal Bandwidth 160 200 400 500 1500 MHz km MHz km MHz km MHz km MHz km Distance 26m 55m 66m 82m 500m 85 ft 108 ft 216 ft 269 ft 984 ft DOM Support Available 64 Mm Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 21 Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1 OGBase LR Model Number EX XFP 10GE LR Rate 10 Gbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Minimum Launch Power 8 2 dBm Maximum Launch Power 1 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 18 dBm Maximum Input Power 0 5 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 10 km 6 2 miles DOM Support Available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 65 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 21 Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specificat
97. Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches 74 Planning for Switch Installation Site Preparation 81 Site Preparation Checklist for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches ee 81 General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches sssssssss 85 Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines for EX Series Switches 0 0 0 0 85 Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches 85 Mounting and Clearance Requirements 87 Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 87 Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches ssssrerereeee 89 Requirements for Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desktop or Wallis ace ent an e e aue area Ee D Sd eh EE 90 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 Ile Ee 91 Cable Specifications 95 Network Cable Specifications for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches 95 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Part 3 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Table of Contents Planning Power Requirements 97 Power Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches sseseeccccee 97 AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 98 Planning the Virtual Chassis 101 Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 SWITCH is centenis tedio ese p Een cub odes E 101 Planning the Virtual Chassis 102 Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches 105 Adding a New Switch to an Existing Vir
98. Procedure on page 165 Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 16 Field replaceable units FRUs are components that you can replace at your site The field replaceable units FRUs in EX3200 and EX4200 switches are m Power supply m Fan tray m Uplink module m SFP transceiver Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 2 Component Descriptions m SFP transceiver m XFP transceiver ES NOTE Uplink modules are not part of the standard package and must be ordered separately The power supply fan tray uplink module and transceivers are hot removable and hot insertable You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions eS NOTE If you have a Juniper J Care service contract register any addition change or upgrade of hardware components at https www juniper net customers csc management updateinstallbase jsp Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts This note applies if you change the type of power supply or add a new type of uplink module It does not apply if you replace these components with the same type of component Related Topics m Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 33 m Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 130 m Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 172 m Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page
99. RJ 45 connector An RJ 45 cable with a connector attached is supplied with the switch Table 17 Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Pin Signal Description 1 TRP1 Transmit receive data pair 1 2 TRP1 Transmit receive data pair 1 3 TRP2 Transmit receive data pair 2 4 TRP3 Transmit receive data pair 3 5 TRP3 Transmit receive data pair 3 6 TRP2 Transmit receive data pair 2 7 TRP4 Transmit receive data pair 4 8 TRP4 Transmit receive data pair 4 Related Topics m See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 for port location m See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 for port location m Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Management on page 152 42 1H Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chapter 3 Component Specifications Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Optional uplink modules for EX3200 and EX4200 switches support SFP SFP or XFP transceivers This topic describes the optical interfaces supported for those transceivers It also lists the copper interface supported for the SFP transceivers eu NOTE Use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased from Juniper Networks for your EX Series switch The Gigabit Ethernet SFP SFP or XFP transceivers installed in EX3200 or EX4200 switches support digital opti
100. Rate 1000 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Single Transmitter Wavelength 1550 nm Receiver Wavelength 1310 nm Minimum Launch Power 9 dBm Maximum Launch Power 5 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 5 dBm Maximum Input Power 21 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 10 km 6 2 miles DOM Support Available 50 HW Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base BX U Model Number EX SFP GE40KT15R15 Rate 1000 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Single Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Receiver Wavelength 1550 nm Minimum Launch Power 6 5 dBm Maximum Launch Power 2 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 5 dBm Maximum Input Power 25 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 40 km 24 8 miles DOM Support Available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 51 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base BX D Model Number
101. Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 m See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine SRE Module in an EX8208 Switch m See Routing Engine RE Module in an EX8216 Switch 2 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable into the console server see Figure 62 on page 154 or management console see Figure 65 on page 154 To configure the switch from the management console see Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 or Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 Figure 62 Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console Through a Console Server To Console port Console server on the switch 9020547 Figure 63 Connecting an EX Series Switch Directly to a Management Console To Console port Laptop CPU on the switch 9020570 m Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Management on page 152 m Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch on page 41 Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch Cables Connecting the EX8200 Switch to Management Devices Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Modem You can connect an EX Series switch to a modem through the console port on the switch Before you connect the port to the modem you must set the serial console speed on the switch and configure port settings on the modem Before you co
102. Release 10 0 or earlier reboot the switch You can see whether the operating mode has been changed to the new mode you configured by issuing the show chassis pic fpc slot s ot number pic slot 1 command m Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 33 m Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 45 Setting the Mode on an SFP Uplink Module CLI Procedure Part 4 Removing Switch Components m Removing Switch Components on page 171 Removing Switch Components m 169 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 170 Mm Removing Switch Components Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components a Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 171 m Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 172 m Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174 m Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 175 m Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 m Disconnecting a Fiber Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch on page 179 m Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch on page 180 m Replacing a Member Switch of a Virtual Chassis Configuration CLI Procedure on page 182 Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components The EX3200 and EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses the hardware components The field replaceable units FRUs in EX
103. Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 197 m Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component on page 198 m Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches on page 199 m Packing an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping on page 201 Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement If you need to return a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement follow this procedure 1 Determine the serial number of the component For instructions see Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component on page 198 2 Obtain an RMA number from JTAC as described in Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches on page 199 ce NOTE Do not return any component to Juniper Networks unless you have first obtained an RMA number Juniper Networks reserves the right to refuse shipments that do not have an RMA Refused shipments are returned to the customer through collect freight 3 Pack the switch or component for shipping as described in Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping on page 201 For more information about return and repair policies see the customer support page at http www juniper net support guidelines html Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component fo
104. The DC power supplies for EX3200 and EX4200 switches are shipped with jumpers from A input to B input tied together and jumpers from A input to B input tied together NOTE The A and B terminals are referred to as RTN and A and B terminals are referred to as 48 V in DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches on page 245 and DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch m 149 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 5 Remove the screw securing the terminal block cover using the Phillips screwdriver number 2 and remove the terminal block cover see Figure 57 on page 150 Save the screw Figure 57 Removing the Terminal Block Cover from a DC Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 9020205 4 Remove the screws on the terminals using the Phillips screwdriver number 2 Save the screws A WARNING Ensure that the power cables do not block access to switch components or drape where people can trip on them 5 Connect the power supplies to the power sources Secure power source cables to the power supplies by screwing the ring lugs attached to the cables to the appropriate terminals by using the screw from the terminals see Figure 58 on page 151 m To connect a power supply to a power source a Leave the jumpers on the power supply termi
105. To supply sufficient power terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable of supplying at least 60 A at 48 VDC for EX8208 switches To supply sufficient power terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable of supplying at least 100 A at 48 VDC for EX8216 switches Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring Be sure to connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid office earth ground A closed loop ring is recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud m Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC m ADC powered router that is equipped with a DC terminal block is intended only for installation in a restricted access location In the United States a restricted access area is one in accordance with Articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 ES NOTE Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker This breaker must protect against excess currents short circuits and earth grounding faults in accordance with NEC ANSI NFPA 70 m Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct Under certain conditions connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage the equipment DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches MN 241 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics m
106. X3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 40 m Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch on page 41 m Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 42 m Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 43 m Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 67 m Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 74 USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch The following Juniper Networks USB flash drives have been tested and are officially supported for the USB port on all EX Series switches m RE USB 1G S m RE USB 2G S m RE USB 4G S A CAUTION Any USB memory product not listed as supported for EX Series switches has not been tested by Juniper Networks The use of any unsupported USB memory product could expose your EX Series switch to unpredictable behavior Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC can provide only limited support for issues related to unsupported hardware We strongly recommend that you use only supported USB flash drives All USB flash drives used on EX Series switches must have the following features m USB 2 0 or later m Formatted with a FAT or MS DOS file system m If the switch is running JUNOS Release 9 5 or earlier the formatting method must use a master boot record Windows formatting by default does not use a USB Port Specifications for an EX Series
107. X3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 156 To remove an SFP SFP or XFP transceiver from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch on page 31 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 32 m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 33 m Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 45 Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 172 nm The power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is a hot removable and hot insertable field replaceable unit FRU You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions Before you begin removing a power supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 236 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove a power supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch chassis m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap m Phillips screwdriver number 2 m An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat CAUTION Do not leave the power supply slot empty for a long time while the switch is on The power supply mus
108. X5200 and EX4200 switches Uplink modules provide two 10 gigabit small form factor pluggable XFP transceivers four 1 gigabit small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers or two 10 gigabit small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers You can use XFP SFP or SFP ports to connect an access switch to a distribution switch or to interconnect member switches of a Virtual Chassis across multiple wiring closets Power over Ethernet PoE Ports Related Topics PoE ports provide electrical current to devices through the network cables so that separate power cords for devices such as IP phones wireless access points and security cameras are unnecessary Both the EX3200 and EX4200 switches have options of full all 24 or 48 ports or partial 8 ports PoE capability Full PoE models are primarily used in IP telephony environments Partial POE models are used in environments where for example only a few ports for wireless access points or security cameras are required m EX3200 Switch Models on page 6 m EX4200 Switch Models on page 6 m Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 m Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 81 EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview M 5 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches EX3200 Switch Models The EX3200 switch is available with 24 or 48 ports with partial or full Power over Ethernet PoE capability Table 1 on page 6
109. a Management Console on page 155 Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch on page 41 Connecting the Modem to the Console Port Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch EX Series switches have field replaceable unit FRU optical transceivers to which you can connect fiber optic cables Before you begin connecting a fiber optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in an EX Series switch ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 To connect a fiber optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in an EX Series switch EN WARNING Do not look directly into a fiber optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber optic cables Fiber optic transceivers and fiber optic cables connected to transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes 1 If the fiber optic cable connector is covered by a rubber safety cap remove the cap Save the cap 2 Remove the rubber safety cap from the optical transceiver Save the cap 5 Insert the cable connector into the optical transceiver see Figure 65 on page 159 Figure 65 Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver Installed in an EX Series Switch Transceiver 9027016 Fiber optic cable 4 Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight Place exc
110. a four post rack by using the mounting brackets provided with the switch See Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 118 E NOTE If you need to mount the switch in a recessed position on either a two post rack or a four post rack you can use the 2 in recess front brackets provided in the separately orderable four post rack mount kit CS NOTE If you are mounting an EX4200 switch on four posts ensure that the rack is 27 5 in through 50 5 in deep if you will mount the switch flush with the rack front and that the rack is 29 5 in through 32 5 in deep if you will mount the switch 2 in recessed from the rack front thus ensuring that the protective earthing terminal is accessible through the opening in the rear bracket Before mounting the switch on four posts in a rack m Verify that the site meets the requirements described in Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 81 m Place the rack in its permanent location allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance and secure it to the building structure m Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 with particular attention to Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 220 m Remove the switch from the shipping carton see Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 114 Ensure that you have the following parts and to
111. abit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches sssssssss eee Table 21 Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches ssssssss eee Table 22 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX42 OO SWIG ES sm ro Peer erepto utt dag tel A lande e o uat Table 25 Virtual Chassis Ports VCPs Connector Pinout Information List of Tables W xix Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Part 2 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 7 Part 3 Chapter 9 Chapter 11 XX MW List of Tables Planning for Switch Installation Site Preparation 81 Table 24 Site Preparation Checker 81 Table 25 Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines et reni a a a ai 84 Table 26 EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances 00 0 0 eee 85 Mounting and Clearance Requirements 87 Table 27 Rack Requirements and Specifications for the Switch 87 Table 28 Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for the Switch 89 Planning Power Requirements 97 Table 29 AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 WIEN At cr M LER S 97 Table 30 DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Sls Stan plc da aaa easier NA 97 Table 31 AC Power Cord Specifications sssssssssssssee 98 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components Installing the Switch 113 Table 32 Inventor
112. able from an EX4200 Switch Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components To disconnect a Virtual Chassis cable from an EX4200 switch see Figure 75 on page 181 1 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis 2 Loosen the screws on the locking cover by using the cross head screwdriver 5 Slide the locking cover back 4 Gently pull the release pull tab on the Virtual Chassis cable connector to release the lock holding the Virtual Chassis cable connector in the Virtual Chassis port 5 Gently pull the Virtual Chassis cable connector out of the Virtual Chassis port Figure 73 Virtual Chassis Cable Connector in an EX4200 Switch Virtual chassis cable connector 9020121 NOTE If you order Virtual Chassis cables separately you must reuse the locking covers provided with the original cable or order Virtual Chassis cable locking covers also separately Related Topics m Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch on page 157 m Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on page 101 m Understanding Virtual Chassis Components m Planning the Virtual Chassis on page 102 m Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 74 Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch m 181 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Replacing a M
113. afety and compliance information for EX2200 switches Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Component descriptions site preparation installation replacement and safety and compliance information for EX5200 and EX4200 switches Complete Hardware Guide for EX8208 Switches Component descriptions site preparation installation replacement and safety and compliance information for EX8208 switches How to Use This Guide NW xxi Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Title Description Complete Hardware Guide for EX8216 Switches Component descriptions site preparation installation replacement and safety and compliance information for EX8216 switches Complete Software Guide for JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Software feature descriptions configuration examples and tasks for JUNOS Software for EX Series switches Software Topic Collections Software feature descriptions configuration examples and tasks and reference pages for configuration statements and operational commands This information also appears in the Complete Software Guide for JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Access Control JUNOSS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Alarms and System Log Messages JUNOSS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Configuration and File Manage
114. alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your workspace m Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit Always check the circuit before starting to work m Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area such as moist floors ungrounded power extension cords and missing safety grounds m Operate the EX Series switch within marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions m Toensure that the EX Series switch and peripheral equipment function safely and correctly use the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment and make certain they are in good condition You can remove and replace many switch components without powering off or disconnecting power to the switch as detailed elsewhere in the hardware documentation for this product Never install equipment if it appears damaged Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 258 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches Switch components that are shipped in antistatic bags are sensitive to damage from static electricity Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 50 V You can easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic 236 Mm Prevention of Electrostatic
115. amp Warning for EX Series Switches ssssssssssse 221 Rack Mounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches 221 Wall Mounting Warning for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches eeece 225 Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches 0 0 0 eee 226 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series uci a EE E 227 pattery Haridling Warning tattoo Pdl OR PR dashes iban 227 Jewelry Removal Warning besteet dia liga be La eta tn 228 Lightning Activity Warning sssssssssss e 250 Operating Temperature Warning sssssss nro ninia 251 Product Disposal Warning zucca ee rtt red erp ees 252 Chapter 20 Part 9 Chapter 21 Table of Contents Power and Electrical Safety Information 235 General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series SWIECHES aia ut Ee d E e ted eere Pete Pr Le Coe Lag ge dg 255 Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches 256 AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches 258 AC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches 0 0 00 259 Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches 240 Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies Warning for EX4200 AMIPERAS 240 DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches 241 DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches cecrnee 242 DC Power Grounding R
116. and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 m DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 242 m DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches on page 244 m DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches on page 246 DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches 246 m A WARNING When stranded wiring is required use approved wiring terminations such as closed loop or spade type with upturned lugs These terminations must be the appropriate size for the wires and must clamp both the insulation and conductor Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is dient u bedrading te gebruiken die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten zoals het gesloten lus type of het grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen Deze aansluitpunten dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te klemmen Varoitus Jos s ikeellinen johdin on tarpeen k yt hyvaksyttya johdinliitantaa esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liit nt jossa on yl sp in k nnetyt kiinnityskorvat T llaisten liit nt jen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen sek eristeen ett johdinosan Attention Quand des fils to
117. anel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 m Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 236 m Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 132 m Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174 Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch The cooling system in an EX4200 switch consists of a field replaceable unit FRU fan tray with three fans see Figure 22 on page 32 The fan tray is located at the rear of the chassis and provides side to rear chassis cooling see Figure 25 on page 55 Figure 22 Fan Tray Used in an EX4200 Switch Fans 3 9020099 32 HN Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch Chapter 2 Component Descriptions Figure 23 Airflow Through the EX4200 Switch Chassis Front 9020100 Rear The fan tray used in an EX4200 switch comes with load sharing redundancy that can tolerate a single fan failure at room temperature below 45 C 115 F to still provide sufficient cooling Temperature sensors in the chassis monitor the temperature within the chassis The system raises an alarm if the fan fails or if the temperature inside the chassis rises above permitted levels If the temperature inside the chassis rises above the threshold the system shuts
118. ansceiver m XFP transceiver The power supply fan tray uplink module and transceivers are hot removable and hot insertable You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions To install a power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 150 To remove a power supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 172 To install a fan tray in an EX5200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 152 To remove a fan tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Removing a Fan Tray from an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174 Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components m 129 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics To install an uplink module in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 155 To remove an uplink module from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 175 To install an SFP SFP or XFP transceiver in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 136 To remov
119. antistatic surface in an antistatic card rack or in an antistatic bag see Figure 76 on page 237 If you are returning a component place it in an antistatic bag before packing it Figure 76 Place a Component into an Antistatic Bag CAUTION ar DEVICES DO NOT OPEN OR HANDLE CI STATIC FREE WORKSTATION A CAUTION ANSI TIA EIA 568 cables such as category 5e and category 6 can get electrostatically charged In order to dissipate this charge always ground the cables to a suitable and safe earth ground before connecting them to the system Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches Mm 237 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch for the ESD point location See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 for the ESD point location See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 for the ESD point location See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8208 Switch for the ESD point location See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8216 Switch for the ESD point location AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches A CAUTION For switches with AC power supplies an external surge protective device SPD must be used at the AC power source The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC powered switches AC powered s
120. are il supporto dal basso all alto con il componente pi pesante sistemato sul fondo del supporto Se il supporto dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti installare tali dispositivi prima di montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell unit nel supporto Rack Mounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches Mm 223 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches A WARNING Advarsel Unnga fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid m pa denne enheten nar den befinner seg i et kabinett V r n ye med at systemet er stabilt Felgende retningslinjer er gitt for verne om sikkerheten m Juniper Networks switch m installeres i et stativ som er forankret til bygningsstrukturen m Denneenheten ber monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten i kabinettet a Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt skal kabinettet lastes fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet m Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr skal stabilisatorene installeres for montering eller utforing av reparasjonsarbeid pa enheten i kabinettet A WARNING Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta unidade numa estante dever tomar precau es especiais para se certificar de que o sistema possui um suporte est vel As seguintes directrizes ajud lo o a efectuar o seu trabalho com seguranca a O Juniper
121. as described by International Electrotechnical Commission IEC standard 60520 The plug at the male end of the power cord fits into the power source outlet that is standard for your geographical location CAUTION The AC power cord for the switches is intended for use with that switch only and not for any other use NOTE In North America AC power cords must not exceed 4 5 meters approximately 14 75 feet in length to comply with National Electrical Code NEC Sections 400 8 NFPA 75 5 2 2 and 210 52 and Canadian Electrical Code CEC Section 4 010 3 The cords supplied with the switch are in compliance Table 51 on page 98 lists AC power cord specifications provided for each country or region Table 31 AC Power Cord Specifications Country Region Electrical Specifications Plug Standards Australia 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz ASINZ 5112 1995 98 HW AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 7 Planning Power Requirements Table 31 AC Power Cord Specifications continued Country Region Electrical Specifications Plug Standards China 250 VAC 10A 50 Hz GB2099 1 1996 and GB1002 1996 CH1 10P Europe except Italy and United 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz CEE 7 VII Kingdom Italy 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz CEI 23 16 VII Japan 125 VAC 12 A 50 Hz or 60 Hz JIS 8303 North America 125 VAC 13 A 60 Hz NEMA 5 15 United Kingdom 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz BS 1363A
122. aster stores the configuration of the member that was removed When you connect a different member switch the master assigns a new member ID But the old configuration is still stored under the previous member ID of the previous member switch NOTE If you have used a preprovisioned configuration use the replace command to change the serial number in the Virtual Chassis configuration file Substitute the serial number of the replacement member switch on the back of the switch for the serial number of the member switch that was removed 1 Power off and disconnect the member switch to be replaced 2 Ifthe replacement member switch has been previously configured revert that switch s configuration to the factory defaults See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch 3 Connect and power on the replacement member switch 182 Mm Replacing a Member Switch of a Virtual Chassis Configuration CLI Procedure Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components 4 Note the member ID displayed on the front panel 5 Issue the request virtual chassis renumber command from the Virtual Chassis master to change the member switch s current member ID to the member ID that belonged to the member switch that was removed from the Virtual Chassis configuration Remove a Member Switch and Make Its Member ID Available for Reassignment to a Different Switch When you remove a member switch from the Virtual Chassis configuratio
123. ation of the LEDs on the network ports on the front panel m Figure 12 on page 20 shows the location of the LEDs on the uplink module ports on the SFP uplink module m Figure 15 on page 21 shows the location of the LEDs on the uplink module ports on the SFP uplink module m Figure 14 on page 21 shows the location of the LEDs on the uplink module ports on the XFP uplink module Figure 11 LEDs on the Network Ports on the Front Panel Link Activity Status LED LED 9020106 Figure 12 LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP Uplink Module Link Activity Status LED LED 9020107 P Port 3 oto oti Port2 20 1H Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 2 Component Descriptions Figure 13 LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the SFP Uplink Module Port 1 Port 3 Port 2 AAA go20123 Operating mode LED Link Activity Status LED LED Figure 14 LEDs on the Uplink Module Ports on the XFP Uplink Module Status LED Status LED 9020108 Port 1 Link Activity Link Activity LED LED The LEDs labeled Link Activity LED in Figure 11 on page 20 Figure 12 on page 20 Figure 14 on page 21 and Figure 15 on page 21 indicate link activity The LEDs labeled Status LED in Figure 11 on page 20 Figure 12 on page 20 Figure 14 on page 21 and Fig
124. atus OK Failed Absent m Temp status OK High Shutdown Show JUNOS Version Status Displays the version of JUNOS Software for EX Series switches loaded on the switch EXIT STAT MENU Select this option to exit the Status menu LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 15 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 4 LCD Panel Menu Options in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Menu Description MAINT The Maintenance menu has the following options to configure and troubleshoot the switch Maintenance u 3 Menu m SYSTEM HALT Select this option using the Enter button to halt the switch Press the Enter button again to confirm the halt Press the Menu button to go to the next option in the Maintenance menu m SYSTEM REBOOT Select this option using the Enter button to reboot the switch Press the Enter button again to confirm the reboot Press the Menu button to go to the next option in the Maintenance menu m LOAD RESCUE Select this option using the Enter button to roll back the switch to the rescue configuration Press the Enter button again to confirm the rollback Press the Menu button to go to the next option in the Maintenance menu m REQUEST VC PORT Select this option using the Enter button to configure an uplink module port or an EX4200 24F network port to be a Virtual Chassis port VCP or to delete a VCP from the switch configuration when you delete the VC
125. aximum Input Power 2 Fiber Type Copper Core Cladding Size Modal Bandwidth Distance 100 m 528 ft DOM Support Not available 44 HW Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base SX Model Number EX SFP 1GE SX Rate 1000 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 850 nm Minimum Launch Power 9 5 dBm Maximum Launch Power 5 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 21 dBm Maximum Input Power 0 dBm Fiber Type MMF Core Cladding Size 62 5125 um 62 5 125 um 50 125 um 50 125 um Fiber Grade FDDI OMI OM2 Modal Bandwidth 160MHz km 200MHz km 400MHz km 500 MHz km Distance 220m 275m 500m 550m 722 ft 902 ft 1640 ft 1804 ft DOM Support Available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 45 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base LX Model Number EX SFP 1GE LX Rate 1000 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count
126. batteria non installata correttamente Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dal produttore Eliminare le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore WARNING Aviso Existe perigo de explosao se a bateria for substitu da incorrectamente Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado pelo fabricante Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instru es do fabricante WARNING Atenci n Existe peligro de explosi n si la bater a se reemplaza de manera incorrecta Reemplazar la bater a exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el equivalente recomendado por el fabricante Desechar las bater as gastadas seg n las instrucciones del fabricante by WARNING Varning Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Ersatt endast batteriet med samma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande F lj tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av anvanda batterier Jewelry Removal Warning A WARNING Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines remove jewelry including rings necklaces and watches Metal objects heat up when connected to power and ground and can cause serious burns or can be welded to the terminals WARNING Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische leidingen is verbonden sieraden inclusief ringen kettingen en horloges verwijderen Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stro
127. ber optic cable connector from the transceiver 5 Cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap WARNING Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing a cable The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light Related Topics 4 Cover the fiber optic cable connector with the rubber safety cap m Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch on page 159 m Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 m Maintaining Fiber Optic Cables in EX Series Switches on page 187 m Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches m Optical Interface Support in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 43 m Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch 180 m If you need to disconnect an EX4200 switch from a Virtual Chassis configuration you need to disconnect the Virtual Chassis cable from the Virtual Chassis ports VCPs Before you begin disconnecting a Virtual Chassis cable from an EX4200 switch ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to disconnect a Virtual Chassis cable from an EX4200 switch m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap m Cross head screwdriver Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis C
128. binet on page 118 Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 121 m Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet on page 124 Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 5 Mounting and Clearance Requirements Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches You can mount the switch in a cabinet that contains a 19 in rack as defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association http www eia org Cabinet requirements consist of m Cabinet size and clearance m Cabinet airflow requirements Table 28 on page 89 provides the cabinet requirements and specifications for the switch Table 28 Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for the Switch Cabinet Requirement Guidelines Cabinet size and clearance m Theminimum cabinet size for accommodating a switch is 25 62 in 60 cm wide and 50 in 76 2 cm deep Large cabinets improve airflow and reduce the chance of overheating To accommodate a single switch in a two post rack or four post rack the cabinet must be at least 1 U high A U is the standard rack unit defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association http www eia org m With adequate cooling air and airflow clearance you can mount 42 switche
129. cal Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 7 for the dimensions and weights of the switch models Cabling requirements for Virtual Chassis You can interconnect the EX4200 switches in a Virtual Chassis configuration through Virtual Chassis ports VCPs using the 0 5 meter long VCP cable supplied in the package Depending on the Virtual Chassis configurations you have you might need cables of different lengths If you need longer cables you can purchase them separately The maximum length allowed for a Virtual Chassis cable is 5 meters To connect switches that are installed farther apart you must configure the uplink module ports as Virtual Chassis ports and use them to interconnect the switches NOTE If you order Virtual Chassis cables separately you should reuse the locking covers provided with the original cable or order Virtual Chassis cable locking covers also separately Related Topics Clearance on the rear of the switch You must have access to the rear of the switch if you plan to interconnect switches to form a Virtual Chassis Power supply You must plan the installation site to meet the power requirements of the EX Series switches in a Virtual Chassis The input power requirements vary depending on the number of Power over Ethernet PoE ports in a switch See Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 for the power requirements for the various configurations of PoE ports in EX4200 switches
130. cal monitoring DOM you can view the diagnostic details for these transceivers by issuing the operational mode CLI command show interfaces diagnostics optics The command does not give any output for copper transceivers Fast Ethernet transceivers or transceivers not purchased from Juniper Networks The four tables in this topic describe the optical interface support over single mode fiber optic SMF and multimode fiber optic MMF cables for SFP SFP and XFP transceivers and over the copper interface for SFP transceivers m Table 18 on page 44 Optical interface support and copper interface support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP transceivers m Table 19 on page 55 Optical interface support for Fast Ethernet SFP transceivers m Table 20 on page 61 Optical interface support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP transceivers m Table 21 on page 64 Optical interface support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP transceivers Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches M 43 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base T Model Number EX SFP 1GE T Rate 10 100 1000 Mbps Connector Type RJ 45 Fiber Count Copper Transmitter Wavelength Minimum Launch Power Maximum Launch Power Minimum Receiver Sensitivity M
131. censor or vendor shall have the right to enforce this Agreement in its own name as if it were Juniper In addition certain third party software may be provided with the Software and is subject to the accompanying license s if any of its respective owner s To the extent portions of the Software are distributed under and subject to open source licenses obligating Juniper to make the source code for such portions publicly available such as the GNU General Public License GPL or the GNU Library General Public License LGPL Juniper will make such source code portions including Juniper modifications as appropriate available upon request for a period of up to three years from the date of distribution Such request can be made in writing to Juniper Networks Inc 1194 N Mathilda Ave Sunnyvale CA 94089 ATTN General Counsel You may obtain a copy of the GPL at http www gnu org licenses gpl html and a copy of the LGPL at http www gnu org licenses lgpl html 15 Miscellaneous This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without reference to its conflicts of laws principles The provisions of the U N Convention for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement For any disputes arising under this Agreement the Parties hereby consent to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction of and venue in the state and federal courts within Santa Clara County California This Agreement const
132. ch circuit supply conductors but is identifiable by green and yellow stripes is installed as part of the branch circuit that supplies the unit The grounding conductor is a separately derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator set WARNING When you install the switch the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdistaminen aina tehtava ensiksi ja maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi Attention Lors de l installation de l appareil la mise la terre doit toujours tre connect e en premier et d connect e en dernier Warnung Der Erdanschlu amp mu bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst hergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell unit eseguire sempre per primo il collegamento a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo Advarsel Nar enheten installeres ma jordledningen alltid tilkobles f rst og frakobles sist Aviso Ao instalar a unidade a liga o terra dever ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada e a ltima a ser desligada jAtencion Al instalar el equipo conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la ultima Varning Vid installation av enheten m ste jordledningen alltid anslutas f rst och kopplas bort sist Related Topics m General Saf
133. ches Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 m AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 258 m AC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 239 Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 240 m Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies Warning for EX4200 Switches on page 240 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 m DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 242 m DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches on page 244 m DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches on page 245 m DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches on page 246 TN Power Warning for EX Series Switches on page 247 m In Case of Electrical Accident Action to Take on an EX Series Switch on page 248 General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches A WARNING Certain ports on the switch are designed for use as intrabuilding within the building interfaces only Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR 1089 CORE Issue 4 and require isolation from the exposed outside plant OSP cabling To comply with NEBS requirements and protect against lightning surges and commercial
134. chpubs software junos junos101 index html Disconnect power from the switch by performing one of the following m Ifthe power source outlet has a power switch set it to the OFF 0 position m Ifthe power source outlet does not have a power switch gently pull out the male end of the power cord connected to the power source outlet Remove the cables that connect the switch to all external devices Remove all field replaceable units FRUs from the switch If the switch is installed on a wall rack or cabinet have one person support the weight of the switch while another person unscrews and removes the mounting screws Use the Phillips screwdriver number 2 to remove the screws Remove the switch from the wall rack cabinet or desk see Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 220 and place the switch in an antistatic bag Place the switch in the shipping carton Place the packing foam on top of and around the switch If you are returning accessories or FRUs with the switch pack them as instructed in Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping on page 202 Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam Close the top of the cardboard shipping box and seal it with packing tape Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping 202 m A CAUTION Do not stack switch components Retu
135. chuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen wordt Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de fabrikant aanbevolen is Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig fabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden WARNING Varoitus R j hdyksen vaara jos akku on vaihdettu v r n akkuun K yt vaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman tai vastaavantyyppist akkua joka on valmistajan suosittelema H vit k ytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan WARNING Attention Danger d explosion si la pile n est pas remplac e correctement Ne la remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou quivalent recommand e par le fabricant Jeter les piles usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant WARNING Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr Ersetzen Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des Herstellers Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches Mm 227 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches WARNING Advarsel Det kan vaere fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes p feil m te Skift kun med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten Kasser brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner WARNING Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la
136. configure and troubleshoot the switch using the options in the Maintenance menu you can disable the menu To disable the Maintenance menu in the LCD panel on EX3200 or EX4200 switches edit user switch set chassis lcd fpc slot number maintenance menu disable where slot number is O on an EX3200 switch or a standalone EX4200 switch or the member ID of the member switch on a Virtual Chassis To disable the Maintenance menu in the LCD panel on EX8200 switches edit user switch set chassis lcd maintenance menu disable If you disable the Maintenance menu while navigating through the menu options exit the menu to return the LCD to the idle mode Enabling the Maintenance Menu By default the Maintenance menu in the LCD panel on an EX Series switch is enabled If you have not changed the Maintenance menu from the default setting you do not need to enable the menu To re enable the Maintenance menu in the LCD panel on EX3200 or EX4200 switches edit user switch set chassis lcd fpc slot number maintenance menu enable where slot number is O on an EX3200 switch or a standalone EX4200 switch or the member ID of the member switch on a Virtual Chassis 166 Mm Configuring the LCD Panel Display on EX Series Switches CLI Procedure Chapter 12 Performing Initial Configuration To re enable the Maintenance menu in the LCD panel on EX8200 switches edit user switch set chassis lcd maintenance menu enable Configuring a Custom
137. ding cable for your EX8208 switch The grounding cable must be 6 AWG 15 5 mm minimum 60 C wire or as permitted by the local code m Grounding lug for your grounding cable See Grounding Cable and Lug Specifications for EX8200 Switches m Washers and 4 20x 75 in screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal m Phillips screwdriver number 2 To connect earth ground to an EX8208 switch Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8208 Switch Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground such as the rack in which the switch is mounted Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing terminal See Figure 52 on page 141 Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with screws Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other switch components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8216 Switch Related Topics There are two protective earthing terminals on an EX8216 switch one on the left side of the chassis and the other on the rear of the chassis Only one of the two protective earthing terminals needs to be permanently connected to earth ground An AC powered EX Series switch chassis gets additional grounding when you plug the power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord app
138. dules on page 5 Power over Ethernet PoE Ports on page 5 EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Types Juniper Networks EX5200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches are two closely related product lines EX5200 switches Typically you deploy these switches in branch environments or wiring closets EX4200 switches You can interconnect EX4200 switches to form a Virtual Chassis that operates as a single network entity You can deploy these switches wherever you need a high density of Gigabit Ethernet ports 24 to 480 ports redundancy or the ability to span a single switch across several wiring closets EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview M 3 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches EX3200 Switches EX4200 Switches Typically EX4200 switches are used in large branch offices campus wiring closets and top of rack locations in a data center Both lines have these features m Run under JUNOS Software for EX Series switches m Have options of 24 port and 48 port models m Have options of full all ports or partial 8 ports Power over Ethernet PoE capability m Have optional uplink modules that provide connection to distribution switches EX5200 switches provide connectivity for low density environments Typically you deploy these switches in branch environments or wiring closets where only one switch is required EX5200 switches are available in models with either 24 or 48 ports and with either all ports eq
139. dyn West Shikha Kalra Steve Levine Editing Cindy Martin Rajan V K Illustration Faith Bradford Brown Cover Design Revision History 5 March 2008 Revision 1 28 April 2008 Revision 2 2 August 2008 Revision 5 50 January 2009 Revision 4 4 April 2009 Revision 5 20 July 2009 Revision 6 4 November 2009 Revision 7 8 December 2009 Revision 8 7 February 2010 Revision 9 The information in this document is current as of the date listed in the revision history YEAR 2000 NOTICE uniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant The JUNOS Software has no known time related limitations through the year 2058 However the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2056 SOFTWARE LICENSE The terms and conditions for using this software are described in the software license contained in the acknowledgment to your purchase order or to the extent applicable to any reseller agreement or end user purchase agreement executed between you and Juniper Networks By using this software you indicate that you understand and agree to be bound by those terms and conditions Generally speaking the software license restricts the manner in which you are permitted to use the software and may contain prohibitions against certain uses The software license may state conditions under which the license is automatically terminated You should consult the license for further details For complet
140. e Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics Advarsel Fer det utfores arbeid pa kabinettet eller det arbeides i naerheten av stromforsyningsenheter skal str mledningen trekkes ut pa vekselstremsenheter Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de fornecimento de energia desligue o cabo de alimentac o nas unidades de corrente alternada Atenci n Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente de alimentaci n desenchufar el cable de alimentaci n en los equipos de corriente alterna CA Varning Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller n ra str mf rs rjningsenheter skall du f r v xelstr msenheter dra ur natsladden m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 258 Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches A WARNING For EX Series switches that have more than one power supply connection you must ensure that all power connections are fully disconnected so that power to the switch is completely removed Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m AC Power Electrical Safety Guideline
141. e an SFP SFP or XFP transceiver from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch follow instructions in Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch on page 31 a Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 32 m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 33 m Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 45 Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 130 m The power supply in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is a hot removable and hot insertable field replaceable unit FRU You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install a power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch chassis m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap m Phillips 4 screwdriver number 2 Before you begin installing a power supply in an EX5200 or EX4200 switch ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 To install a power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch see Figure 46 on page 151 1 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis 2 Taking care not to touch power supply components p
142. e for paying Taxes arising from the purchase of the license or importation or use of the Software If applicable valid exemption documentation for each taxing jurisdiction shall be provided to Juniper prior to invoicing and Customer shall promptly notify Juniper if their exemption is revoked or modified All payments made by Customer shall be net of any applicable withholding tax Customer will provide reasonable assistance to Juniper in connection with such withholding taxes by promptly providing Juniper with valid tax receipts and other required documentation showing Customer s payment of any withholding taxes completing appropriate applications that would reduce the amount of withholding tax to be paid and notifying and assisting Juniper in any audit or tax proceeding related to transactions hereunder Customer shall comply with all applicable tax laws and regulations and Customer will promptly pay or reimburse Juniper for all costs and damages related to any liability incurred by Juniper as a result of Customer s non compliance or delay with its responsibilities herein Customer s obligations under this Section shall survive termination or expiration of this Agreement 11 Export Customer agrees to comply with all applicable export laws and restrictions and regulations of any United States and any applicable foreign agency or authority and not to export or re export the Software or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions laws
143. e ped t aed eta xxiii Documeritatton Symbols Key ara cet e tete eee d tees xxiii Documentation Feedback 4 5 oot retebtt ede eet P oe e ro eoe n reae e XXV Requesting Tee beantragen XXV Self Help Online Tools and Resources sssssssss XXV Opening a Case with IAG notor sedeo i tte ten ello xxvi Switch and Components Overview and Specifications EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview 3 EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview sssssssse 5 EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Types ssssssssss reprit ss 5 EX3 2 OO SWITCHES ceti e eedem tbe te elut e EHE ce bd ese gd 4 EX4200 SWItCNES eret eme eee eer eu Ai Maes eh da ad teak 4 Uplink Modules oso tit 5 Power over Ethernet POE Porte 5 EX3200 Switch Models n dla et e eed 6 EX4200 Switch Models sanira a I me nm e ene nnne inis 6 Chassis Physical Specifications for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches 7 Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch 8 Rear Panel of n EX3200 Switch t eter tr et e AR EUER De ice 9 Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch 10 Rear Rariel of an EX42 00 Switches iater dai 11 Component Descriptions 13 LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches oocccccccnncccccccnnonoconcccnnnniccncnnnnns 15 LCD Panel Modes o ie IR petet deterior te Ae een 14 LCD Panel Menus e Lu A 15 Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches ee 16 Chassis Status LEDs in EX3200 Switches ocoooccccccocccncncconcnncnononocononocononoccnnnnos 17 Chassis Sta
144. e product documentation please see the Juniper Networks Web site at www juniper net techpubs END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT AGREEMENT BEFORE DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE BY DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE EXPRESSING YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN YOU AS CUSTOMER OR IF YOU ARE NOT THE CUSTOMER AS A REPRESENTATIVE AGENT AUTHORIZED TO BIND THE CUSTOMER CONSENT TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT OR CANNOT AGREE TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN THEN A DO NOT DOWNLOAD INSTALL OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND B YOU MAY CONTACT JUNIPER NETWORKS REGARDING LICENSE TERMS 1 The Parties The parties to this Agreement are i Juniper Networks Inc if the Customer s principal office is located in the Americas or Juniper Networks Cayman Limited if the Customer s principal office is located outside the Americas such applicable entity being referred to herein as Juniper and ii the person or organization that originally purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller the applicable license s for use of the Software Customer collectively the Parties 2 The Software In this Agreement Software means the program modules and features of the Juniper or Juniper supplied software for which Customer has paid the applicable license or support fees to Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller or which was embedded by Juniper
145. eates the required interfaces if the uplink module has transceivers in its ports and when new transceivers are installed in those ports SFP Uplink Module You can use the optional uplink module ports to connect an access switch to a distribution switch You can also use these ports to connect members of a Virtual Chassis across multiple wiring closets When connecting uplink module ports you can install an SFP uplink module at one end of the connection and install an SFP uplink module configured to operate in the 1 gigabit mode at the other end Likewise you can install an XFP uplink module at one end of the connection and install an SFP uplink module configured to operate in the 10 gigabit mode at the other end This topic describes m SFP Uplink Module on page 34 m SFP Uplink Module on page 55 m XFP Uplink Module on page 36 Figure 24 on page 34 shows the SFP uplink module which provides four ports for 1 gigabit SFP transceivers Figure 24 SFP Uplink Module Link Activity Status LED LED e est Se So lt a 9020107 34 HW Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 2 Component Descriptions SFP uplink modules are shipped with dust covers preinstalled in the ports eS NOTE On an EX3200 switch if you install a transceiver in an SFP uplink module a corresponding network port from the last four built in ports is disabled For example if you install an SFP transceiver in port 2 on the uplink
146. ed by Customer only to manage access to Customer s enterprise network Specifically service provider customers are expressly prohibited from using the Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel Belted Radius software to support any commercial network access services The foregoing license is not transferable or assignable by Customer No license is granted herein to any user who did not originally purchase the applicable license s for the Software from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller 4 Use Prohibitions Notwithstanding the foregoing the license provided herein does not permit the Customer to and Customer agrees not to and shall not a modify unbundle reverse engineer or create derivative works based on the Software b make unauthorized copies of the Software except as necessary for backup purposes c rent sell transfer or grant any rights in and to any copy of the Software in any form to any third party d remove any proprietary notices labels or marks on or in any copy of the Software or any product in which the Software is embedded e distribute any copy of the Software to any third party including as may be embedded in Juniper equipment sold in the secondhand market f use any locked or key restricted feature function service application operation or capability without first purchasing the applicable license s and obtaining a valid key from Juniper even if such feature function service application operatio
147. eiver in an EX Series Switch on page 156 m Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches m Optical Interface Support in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 43 m Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches Disconnecting a Fiber Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch EX Series switches have field replaceable unit FRU optical transceivers to which you can connect fiber optic cables Before you begin disconnecting a fiber optic cable from an optical transceiver installed in an EX Series switch ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available m A rubber safety cap to cover the transceiver m A rubber safety cap to cover the fiber optic cable connector Disconnecting a Fiber Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch m 179 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches To disconnect a fiber optic cable from an optical transceiver installed in an EX Series switch 1 Disable the port in which the transceiver is installed by issuing the command edit interfaces user switch set interface name disable WARNING Do not look directly into a fiber optic transceiver or into the ends of fiber optic cables Fiber optic transceivers and fiber optic cables connected to transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes 2 Carefully unplug the fi
148. ember Switch of a Virtual Chassis Configuration CLI Procedure You can replace a member switch of a Virtual Chassis configuration without disrupting network service for the other members You can retain the existing configuration of the member switch and apply it to a new member switch or you can free up the member ID and make it available for assignment to a new member switch To replace a member switch use the procedure that matches what you need to accomplish m Remove Repair and Reinstall the Same Switch on page 182 m Remove a Member Switch Replace with a Different Switch and Reapply the Old Configuration on page 182 m Remove a Member Switch and Make Its Member ID Available for Reassignment to a Different Switch on page 185 Remove Repair and Reinstall the Same Switch If you need to repair a member switch you can remove it from the Virtual Chassis configuration without disrupting network service for the other members The master stores the configuration of the member ID so that it can be reapplied when the member switch with the same base MAC address is reconnected 1 Power off and disconnect the member switch to be repaired 2 Repair as necessary 5 Reconnect and power on the member switch Remove a Member Switch Replace with a Different Switch and Reapply the Old Configuration If you are unable to repair a member switch you can replace it with a different member switch and retain the old configuration The m
149. en Port is set to full duplex mode m Unlit Port is set to half duplex mode LED POE Indicates the PoE status PoE is not enabled on uplink module ports therefore the LED for those ports is always unlit The status indicators for network ports on the front panel are Green POoE is enabled on the port Amber PoE is enabled on the port but no power is drawn from the port because of one of the following m No device that draws power from the port is connected to the port m XA device that draws power from the port is connected to the port but the device is not drawing any power from the port m X Unlit POoE is not enabled on the port LED SPD Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 23 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 8 Status LED on Network Ports in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued LED LCD Indicator State and Description Indicates the speed The speed indicators for network ports on the front panel are m One blink per second 10 Mbps Two blinks per second 100 Mbps Three blinks per second 1000 Mbps The speed indicators for network ports on the SFP uplink module are m Green 1000 Mbps m Unlit 10 100 Mbps The speed indicators for network ports on the SFP uplink module are m Green The speed of the transceiver installed in the port is the same as the speed at which the uplink module port is configured to operate m
150. ente continua CC est cortada OFF Para asegurarse de que toda la alimentaci n est cortada OFF localizar el interruptor autom tico en el panel que alimenta al circuito de corriente continua cambiar el interruptor autom tico a la posici n de Apagado OFF y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor autom tico en posici n de Apagado OFF Varning Innan du utf r nagon av f ljande procedurer m ste du kontrollera att str mf rs rjningen till likstr mskretsen r bruten Kontrollera att all str mf rs rjning ar BRUTEN genom att sla AV det versp nningsskydd som skyddar likstr mskretsen och tejpa fast versp nningsskyddets omkopplare i FR N l get Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 m DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches on page 244 m DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches on page 245 m DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches on page 246 DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches WM 243 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and ungrounded bran
151. equirements and Warning for EX Series Switches 244 DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches 245 DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches 246 TN Power Warning for EX Series Switches 247 In Case of Electrical Accident Action to Take on an EX Series Switch 248 Compliance Information Compliance Information 253 Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches ssssssssssee 255 Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches 254 Canada xod tedio te eie eo A eet Sy det diebus 254 European COHEN ech dE DAS 255 IE M 255 United States esce Dem C e M s c d 255 ECC Part 15 Statement anal oeste test 255 Non Regulatory Environmental Standards sss 256 Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches 256 Table of Contents W xiii Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches xiv MW Table of Contents List of Figures Part 1 Part 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 5 Chapter 7 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview 3 Figure 1 EX3200 Switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet Porte 8 Figure 2 EX3200 Switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet Porte 8 Figure 3 EX5200 Switch Rear Panel 9 Figure 4 EX4200 Switch with 48 Gigabit Ethernet Ports eccerre 10 Figure 5 EX4200 Switch with 24 Gigabit Ethernet Ports eccerre 10 Figure 6
152. er 2 To install a fan tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch chassis see Figure 47 on page 132 and Figure 48 on page 133 1 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis A CAUTION If you are installing a fan tray in an EX3200 switch ensure the fan faces upwards If you are installing a fan tray in an EX4200 switch ensure the fans face downwards 2 Remove the fan tray from its bag Using both hands align the tray with the fan tray guides on the fan tray slot on the rear panel of the chassis and slide it in until it is fully seated 5 Tighten the screw or screws on the fan tray by using the Phillips screwdriver number 2 Figure 47 Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 Switch 9020062 Tighten captive screw 132 mp Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chapter 10 Installing Switch Components Figure 48 Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch 9020104 MES I E TOO gt RARER Q Fan tray Tighten captive screws Related Topics m Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174 m Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 mw Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch on page 51 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 32 m Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 m Rear Panel of an EX320
153. er from the switch 5 lf possible send another person to get medical aid Otherwise assess the condition of the victim then call for help m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 In Case of Electrical Accident Action to Take on an EX Series Switch Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information m AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 258 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 In Case of Electrical Accident Action to Take on an EX Series Switch M 249 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 250 HW nCase of Electrical Accident Action to Take on an EX Series Switch Part 9 Compliance Information m Compliance Information on page 255 Compliance Information M 2521 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 252 HN Compliance Information Chapter 21 Compliance Information Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 255 Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 254 Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 256 Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches EX Series switches comply with the following standards Safety CAN CSA 22 2 No 60950 1 05 UL 60950 1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment EN 60950
154. er l unit en casier WARNING Warnung Zur Vermeidung von K rperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell m ssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen da das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gew hrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen Der Juniper Networks switch mu in einem Gestell installiert werden das in der Gebaudestruktur verankert ist Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gef llten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubeh r geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten WARNING Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione di questa unit in un supporto occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che il sistema rimanga stabile Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la sicurezza personale Il Juniper Networks switch deve essere installato in un telaio il quale deve essere fissato alla struttura dell edificio Questa unit deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto se si tratta dell unica unit da montare nel supporto Quando questa unit viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno caric
155. er to an EX8200 Switch m Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 146 m The power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is a hot removable and hot insertable field replaceable unit FRU located on the rear panel You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions Ensure that you have a power cord appropriate for your geographical location available to connect AC power to an EX3200 or EX4200 switch Before you begin connecting AC power to an EX3200 or EX4200 switch m Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 m Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground CAUTION Before you connect power to the switch a licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch for example by causing a short circuit To meet safety and electromagnetic interference EMI requirements and to ensure proper operation you must c
156. ess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop Placing fasteners on a loop helps cables maintain their shape A CAUTION Do not bend fiber optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose Do not let fiber optic cables hang free from the connector Do not allow fastened loops of cables to dangle which stresses the cables at the fastening point Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch m 159 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 160 m Related Topics m Disconnecting a Fiber Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch on page 179 m Ins talling a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 156 m Maintaining Fiber Optic Cables in EX Series Switches on page 187 Op Op Op tical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches tical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 45 tical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch Chapter 12 Performing Initial Configuration m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 163 m Configuring the LCD Panel Display on EX Series Switches CLI Procedure on page 166 m Setting the Mode on an SFP Uplink Module CLI Procedure on page 168 Connecting and Configurin
157. ety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 m DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 242 m DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches on page 245 m DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches on page 246 244 HW DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning for EX Series Switches Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches A WARNING Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs When connecting power the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground RTN to RTN then 48 V to 48 V When disconnecting power the proper wiring sequence is 48 V to 48 V RTN to RTN then ground to ground Note that the ground wire must always be connected first and disconnected last Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde RTN naar RTN en 48 V naar 48 V De juiste bedradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en 48 naar 48 V RTN naar RTN aarde naar aarde Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon RTN varten RTN 48 V varten 48 V Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on 48 V varten 48 V RTN varten RTN maajohto maajohtoon Attention C blez l approvisionnement d alimentation
158. ews 6 lfitis an EX4200 24F switch we recommend you insert dust covers in unused SFP ports Related Topics m Connecting AC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 m Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 163 a Wall Mounting Warning for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 225 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall WM 127 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 128 HN Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall Chapter 10 Installing Switch Components a Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 m Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 130 lling a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 152 lling an Uplink Module in an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 133 m Inst Di m Ins Di m Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 156 m Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch on page 137 Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components The EX3200 and EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses the hardware components The field replaceable units FRUs in EX3200 and EX4200 switches are m Power supply m Fan tray m Uplink module m SFP transceiver m SFP tr
159. g Initial Configuration D NOTE On EX8200 switches only the out of band management option is available In band Management Use VLAN default for management Select this option to configure all data interfaces as members of the default VLAN Click Next Specify the management IP address and the default gateway for the default VLAN mw In band Management Create new VLAN for management Select this option to create a management VLAN Click Next Specify the VLAN name VLAN ID member interfaces management IP address and default gateway for the new VLAN Out of band Management Configure management port Select this option to configure only the management interface Click Next Specify the IP address and default gateway for the management interface 8 Click Next 9 Onthe Manage Access page you may select options to enable Telnet SSH and SNMP services For SNMP you can configure the read community location and contact 10 Click Next The Summary screen displays the configured settings 11 Click Finish The configuration is committed as the active switch configuration You can now log in with the CLI or the J Web interface to continue configuring the switch If you use the J Web interface to continue configuring the switch the Web session is redirected to the new management IP address If the connection cannot be made the J Web interface displays instructions for starting a J Web session NOTE After
160. g an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure There are two ways to connect and configure an EX Series switch one method is through the console using the CLI and the other is using the J Web interface This topic describes the CLI procedure Before you begin connecting and configuring an EX Series switch through the console using the CLI m Set the following parameter values in the console server or PC Baud Rate 9600 Flow Control None Data 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 DCD State Disregard m Torunthe ezsetup script the switch must have the factory default configuration If you have configured anything on the switch and want to run ezsetup revert to the factory default configuration See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure m 161 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches To configure the switch from the console 1 Connect the console port to a laptop or PC using the RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter The RJ 45 cable and RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter are supplied with the switch m EX2200 EX3200 or EX4200 switch The console port is located on the rear panel of the switch m EX8200 switch The console port is located on the Switch Fabric and Routing Engine SRE module in slot SREO in an EX8208 switch or on the Routing Engine RE module in slot REO in an EX8216 switch 2 At the JUNOS s
161. g the Phillips screwdriver number 2 Do not overtighten apply between 8 Ib in 0 9 Nm and 9 Ib in 1 02 Nm of torque to the screws Figure 58 Securing Ring Lugs to the Terminals on the DC Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 9020203 6 Replace the terminal block cover and secure it using the screw Use the Phillips screwdriver number 2 to tighten the screw 7 Close the input circuit breaker 8 Verify that the LEDs on the power supply are lit green and are on steadily m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 30 Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch m 151 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Management 152 m You can monitor and manage an EX Series switch using a dedicated management channel EX Series switches have a management port with an RJ 45 connector for out of band management Use the management port to connect the EX Series switch to the management device Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable with an RJ 45 connector available One such cable is provided with the switch Figure 59 on page 152 shows the RJ 45 connector of the Ethernet cable supplied with
162. g the Switch and Switch Components Installing the Switch 113 Figure 36 Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch sssssssssssss 115 Figure 57 Attaching Rubber Feet to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch GEET 118 Figure 38 Attaching the Mounting Bracket Along the Front of the Switch 119 Figure 59 Mounting the Switch on Two Posts in a Rack 0 00 0 ee 120 Figure 40 Attaching the Front Bracket to the Side Rail Bracket 122 Figure 41 Attaching the Side Rail Bracket to the Switch Chassis 125 Figure 42 Mounting the Switch to the Front Posts in a Rack 125 Figure 45 Sliding the Rear Brackets to the Rear of a Four Post Rack 124 Figure 44 Attaching Wall Mount Brackets to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Elle 126 Figure 45 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall 127 Installing Switch Components 129 Figure 46 Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 151 Figure 47 Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 Switch ees 152 Figure 48 Installing a Fan Tray in an EX4200 Switch eee 155 Figure 49 Installing an Uplink Module in an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch 135 Figure 50 Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch ooo 157 Figure 51 Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch 158 Connecting the Switch 141 Figure 52 Connecting a Grounding Cable to an EX Series Switch 141
163. gle Transmitter Wavelength 1490 nm Receiver Wavelength 1310 nm Minimum Launch Power 9 dBm Maximum Launch Power 5 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 50 dBm Maximum Input Power 5 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 10 km 6 2 miles DOM Support Available 48 W amp Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base BX U Model Number EX SFP GE10KT15R15 Rate 1000 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Single Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Receiver Wavelength 1550 nm Minimum Launch Power 9 dBm Maximum Launch Power 3 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 5 dBm Maximum Input Power 21 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 10 km 6 2 miles DOM Support Available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 49 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 1000Base BX D Model Number EX SFP GE10KT15R13
164. gle Transmitter Wavelength 1550 nm Receiver Wavelength 1510 nm Minimum Launch Power 14 dBm Maximum Launch Power 8 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 45 dBm Maximum Input Power 8 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 20 km 12 4 miles DOM Support Not available 58 HW Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 19 Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 100Base LX40K Model Number EX SFP 1FE LX40K Rate 100 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 1510 nm Minimum Launch Power 5 dBm Maximum Launch Power 0 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 52 dBm Maximum Input Power 8 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 40 km 24 8 miles DOM Support Not available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches M 59 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 19 Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 100Base LH or Model Number EX SFP 1FE LH 100Base ZX Rate 100 Mbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmit
165. gured a static IP address on your PC you will not be able to connect to the switch To obtain an IP address dynamically you must enable a DHCP client on the management PC you connect to the switch NOTE You must complete the initial configuration using the J Web interface within 10 minutes The switch exits the EZSetup mode after 10 minutes and reverts to the default factory configuration and the PC loses connectivity to the switch EX2200 switch The LEDs on the network ports on the front panel blink when the switch is in the EZSetup mode EX5200 EX4200 or EX8200 switch The LCD displays a count down timer once you connect the switch to the management PC From the PC open a Web browser type http 192 168 1 1 in the address field and press Enter On the J Web login page type root as the username leave the password field blank and click Login On the Introduction page click Next On the Basic Settings page modify the hostname the root password and date and time settings m Enter the hostname This is optional m Enter a password and reenter the password m Specify the time zone m Synchronize the date and time settings of the switch with the management PC or set them manually by selecting the appropriate option button This is optional Click Next Use the Management Options page to select the management scenario Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure Chapter 12 Performin
166. h on a Desk or Other Level Surface m 117 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Figure 37 Attaching Rubber Feet to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chassis 9020111 RD Rubber fee Related Topics m Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 mw Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 m Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on two posts of a 19 in rack or cabinet by using the mounting brackets provided with the switch The remainder of this topic uses rack to mean rack or cabinet You can mount the switch on four posts of a four post rack by using the mounting brackets provided with the separately orderable four post rack mount kit See Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 121 eS NOTE If you need to mount the switch in a recessed position on either a two post rack or a four post rack you can use the 2 in recess front brackets provided in the separately orderable four post rack mount kit Before mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on two posts in a rack m Verify that the site
167. hardware components EX5200 and EX4200 switches are shipped in a cardboard carton secured with foam packing material The carton also contains an accessory box and quick start instructions A CAUTION EX3200 and EX4200 switches are maximally protected inside the shipping carton Do not unpack the switches until you are ready to begin installation To unpack an EX3200 or EX4200 switch see Figure 36 on page 115 lA Move the shipping carton to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible but where you have enough room to remove the system components Position the carton so that the arrows are pointing up Open the top flaps on the shipping carton Remove the accessory box and verify the contents against the parts inventory on the label attached to the carton Pull out the packing material holding the switch in place Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch BN m Chapter 9 Installing the Switch 6 Verify the chassis components received against the packing list included with the switch An inventory of parts provided with an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is provided in Table 52 on page 115 7 Savethe shipping carton and packing materials in case you need to move or ship the switch later Figure 36 Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Accessory box y V Packing material ed Switch Shipping carton 9020110 Table 32 Inventory of Components Provided with an EX3200 or
168. he screwdriver to the narrow part of the keyhole see Figure 70 on page 177 A CAUTION Ensure the screwdriver does not slip out of the keyhole when you pull the uplink module out of the switch chassis 4 Using both hands gently pull the screwdriver to slide the uplink module halfway out of the chassis see Figure 71 on page 177 5 Placeone hand under the uplink module to support it and slide it completely out of the chassis 6 Slide the screwdriver out of the keyhole 7 Place the uplink module in an antistatic bag or on an antistatic mat placed on a flat stable surface 176 Hm Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components Figure 70 Sliding the Screwdriver to the Narrow Part of the Keyhole Keyhole opening on uplink module 9020117 Removal tool 9020118 Related Topics m Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 155 m Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 m Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 m Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 m Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 10 Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch The SFP SFP and XFP transceivers for EX Series switches are hot removable and hot insertable field replaceable units FRUs You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions
169. hell prompt root type ezsetup 5 Enter the hostname This is optional 4 Enter the root password you plan to use for this device You are prompted to re enter the root password 5 Enter yes to enable services like Telnet and SSH By default Telnet is not enabled and SSH is enabled ES NOTE When Telnet is enabled you will not be able to log in to an EX Series switch through Telnet using root credentials Root login is allowed only for SSH access 6 Usethe Management Options page to select the management scenario eS NOTE On EX8200 switches only the out of band management option is available m Configure in band management In this scenario you have the following two options m Use the default VLAN m Create a new VLAN If you select this option you are prompted to specify the VLAN name VLAN ID management IP address and default gateway Select the ports that must be part of this VLAN m Configure out of band management Specify the IP address and gateway of the management interface Use this IP address to connect to the switch 7 Specify the SNMP Read Community Location and Contact to configure SNMP parameters These parameters are optional 8 Specify the system date and time Select the time zone from the list These options are optional The configured parameters are displayed Enter yes to commit the configuration The configuration is committed as the active configuration for the switch You can
170. hes For EX3200 switches see AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 98 Before you connect earth ground to the protective earthing terminal on an EX2200 or EX3200 switch ensure that you have the following parts and tools available m Grounding cable for your switch The grounding cable must be minimum 14 AWG 2 mm minimum 90 C wire or as permitted by the local code m Grounding lug for your grounding cable m Washers and 10 52x 25 in screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal m Phillips screwdriver number 2 To connect earth ground to an EX2200 or EX3200 switch 1 Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground such as the rack in which the switch is mounted 2 Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing terminal See Figure 52 on page 141 5 Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with screws 4 Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other switch components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it Connecting Earth Ground to an EX4200 Switch The protective earthing terminal is located on the left side of the chassis in an EX4200 switch 142 1H Connecting Earth Ground to an EX2200 or EX3200 Switch Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch An AC powered EX Series switch chassis gets additional grounding when you plug the
171. ilizzo Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet ved normalt bruk Aviso Este equipamento dever estar ligado terra Certifique se que o host se encontra ligado terra durante a sua utiliza o normal jAtenci n Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra Asegurarse de que el equipo principal est conectado a tierra durante el uso normal Varning Denna utrustning ar avsedd att jordas Se till att vardenheten ar jordad vid normal anv ndning Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches While performing the maintenance activities for EX Series switches observe the following guidelines and warnings m Battery Handling Warning on page 227 m jewelry Removal Warning on page 228 m Lightning Activity Warning on page 230 m Operating Temperature Warning on page 251 m Product Disposal Warning on page 232 Battery Handling Warning AN WARNING Replacing a battery incorrectly might result in an explosion Replace a battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions A WARNING Waars
172. ils with the CLI To list the switch and switch components and their serial numbers enter the following CLI command user switch gt show chassis hardware Hardware inventory ItemVersion Part number Serial number Description Chassis ALO207391164 EX3200 48T FPC 0 REV X1 711 021265 AL0207391164 EX3200 48T 8 POE CPUBUILTIN BUILTIN FPC CPU PIC O BUILTIN BUILTIN 48x 10 100 1000 Base T Fan TrayFan Tray For information about the show chassis hardware command see the JUNOS Software System Basics and Services Command Reference at http www juniper net techpubs software junos junos101 index html Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch EX5200 and EX4200 switches have serial number ID labels located on the rear panel of the chassis see Figure 74 on page 199 and Figure 75 on page 199 198 1H Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components Figure 74 Location of the Serial Number ID Label on an EX3200 Switch Serial number ID label SN BJ0207452149 IIIA 3 Y o o Qoae 2207060 g o MGMT CON LEE D ou DOOD S e Ee EE 1 ES so e S 9020092 ES x E BRRRRRARRIARIARRARTO me Seef O o o Pon OOOO IRIS E 20 KAO DOSO EE dt Q RES He GOODS S BOO E Es EN EI
173. in the cleaning kit you use Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX8200 Switches Maintaining Line Card Cables in EX8200 Switches Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 156 Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 Maintaining Fiber Optic Cables in EX Series Switches m 187 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches m Optical Interface Support in EX2200 Switches m Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 45 m Optical Interface Support in EX8200 Switches 188 1H Maintaining Fiber Optic Cables in EX Series Switches Part 6 Troubleshooting Switch Components m Troubleshooting Switch Components on page 191 Troubleshooting Switch Components m 189 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 190 1H Troubleshooting Switch Components Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Switch Components m Troubleshooting Network Interfaces on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 191 m Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 192 Troubleshooting Network Interfaces on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches This topic provides troubleshooting information for specific problems related to interfaces on EX3200 and EX4200 switches m The interface on one of the last four built in network ports in an EX3200 switch for example interface ge 0 0 23 is down on page 191 m The interface on the port in which
174. inador de la serie Juniper Networks switch se recaliente no lo haga funcionar en un rea en la que se supere la temperatura ambiente m xima recomendada de 40 C Para impedir la restricci n de la entrada de aire deje un espacio m nimo de 15 2 cm alrededor de las aperturas para ventilaci n WARNING Varning F rhindra att en Juniper Networks switch verhettas genom att inte anvanda den i ett omrade dar den maximalt rekommenderade omgivningstemperaturen p 40 C verskrids F rhindra att luftcirkulationen inskr nks genom att se till att det finns fritt utrymme pa minst 15 2 cm omkring ventilations ppningarna Product Disposal Warning AN WARNING Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws and regulations WARNING Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en voorschriften te worden afgedankt WARNING Varoitus T m n tuotteen lopullisesta h vitt misest tulee huolehtia kaikkia valtakunnallisia lakeja ja s nn ksi noudattaen A A WARNING Attention La mise au rebut d finitive de ce produit doit tre effectu e conform ment toutes les lois et r glementations en vigueur 232 1H Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information WARNING Warnung Dieses Produkt muf den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften entsprechend entsorgt werden
175. ines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas European Community Japan United States This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures CORB PX A MBE COS COREA REE TENTA cO EESEREICICAAO0Ss4 COREA mu EES zb SLIBRANSTEMBVET VCCIA The preceding translates as follows This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures VCCI A The EX Series switch has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense FCC Part 15 Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Pa
176. ing a fiber optic cable to a transceiver be sure to secure the fiber optic cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor Never let a fiber optic cable hang free from the connector Avoid bending fiber optic cables beyond their minimum bend radius Bending fiber optic cables into arcs smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose Frequent plugging and unplugging of fiber optic cables in and out of optical instruments can damage the instruments which are expensive to repair Attach a short fiber extension to the optical equipment Any wear and tear due to frequent plugging and unplugging is then absorbed by the short fiber extension which is easier and less expensive to replace than the instruments Keep fiber optic cable connections clean Micro deposits of oil and dust in the canal of the transceiver or cable connector can cause loss of light reduction in signal power and possibly intermittent problems with the optical connection To clean the transceiver canal use an appropriate fiber cleaning device such as RIFOCS Fiber Optic Adaptor Cleaning Wands part number 946 Follow the directions in the cleaning kit you use After cleaning the transceiver make sure that the connector tip of the fiber optic cable is clean Use only an approved alcohol free fiber optic cable cleaning kit such as the Opptex Cletop S Fiber Cleaner Follow the directions
177. ing an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure 165 Configuring the LCD Panel Display on EX Series Switches CLI Procedure EE 166 Disabling the Maintenance Menu 166 Enabling the Maintenance Mem 166 Configuring a Custom Display Message ssssss 167 Setting the Mode on an SFP Uplink Module CLI Procedure 168 Removing Switch Components Removing Switch Components 171 Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware COMPONENTS asus EE 171 Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 172 Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 174 Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 175 Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch sssssssssssssss 177 Disconnecting a Fiber Optic Cable from an EX Series Switch 179 Table of Contents Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch 180 Replacing a Member Switch of a Virtual Chassis Configuration CLI PIOCCOULE intra EE 182 Remove Repair and Reinstall the Same Switch 182 Remove a Member Switch Replace with a Different Switch and Reapply the Old Configuration niue grece de en er Re ete 182 Remove a Member Switch and Make Its Member ID Available for Reassignment to a Different Switch 185 Part 5 Switch and Component Maintenance Chapter 14 Routine Maintenance 187 Maintaining Fiber Optic Cables in EX Series Switches 0 0 0 0 ee
178. ings Port Settings Value Bits per second 115200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None 5 Inthe HyperTerminal window type at Press Enter The modem sends an OK response to verify that it can communicate successfully with the COM port on your desktop or notebook computer 6 To configure the modem to answer a call on the first ring type atsOz1 at the prompt Press Enter 7 To configure the modem to accept modem control DTR signals type at amp d1 at the prompt Press Enter 8 To disable flow control on the modem type at amp kO at the prompt Press Enter 9 To set the fixed serial port speed on the modem type at amp b1 at the prompt Press Enter D NOTE You must set the serial port to the fixed speed so that the modem will not adjust the serial port speed to the negotiated line speed 10 To save the new modem settings type at amp w0 at the prompt Press Enter The modem sends an OK message The modem is now ready to be connected to the switch Connecting the Modem to the Console Port The console port on every EX Series switch accepts a cable with an RJ 45 connector Figure 64 on page 158 shows the RJ 45 connector of the Ethernet cable supplied with the switch Connecting the Modem to the Console Pot m 157 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 158 m Figure 64 Ethernet Cable Connector 9001063 gt D NOTE If your laptop or PC does not have a DB 9 male connec
179. ins leads or solder connections remove the power supply from its bag 5 Loosen the locking lever screw on the left front of the power supply by using the Phillips screwdriver number 2 4 Push down on the locking lever until it is in its lowest position 5 Using both hands place the power supply in the power supply slot on the rear panel of the switch and slide it in until it is fully seated Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chapter 10 Installing Switch Components NOTE The handle on the 520 W AC power supply is at the bottom of the power supply faceplate while the handle on the 600 W and the 950 W AC power supplies is at the top of the faceplate The handle on the 190 W DC power supply runs across the faceplate 6 Pushthe locking lever up to its highest position this action might pull the power supply in 7 Tighten the locking lever screw by using the Phillips screwdriver number 2 Figure 46 Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Locking lever Tighten captive screw NOTE Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated power source outlet NOTE If you have a Juniper J Care service contract register any addition change or upgrade of hardware components at https www juniper net customers csc management updateinstallbase jsp Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts This note applies if you change the type
180. ions 10GBase ER Model Number EX XFP 10GE ER Rate 10 Gbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 1550 nm Minimum Launch Power 5 dBm Maximum Launch Power 2 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 22 dBm Maximum Input Power 1 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 40 km 24 8 miles DOM Support Available 66 HW Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 21 Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet XFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 10GBase ZR Model Number EX XFP 10GE ZR Rate 10 Gbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 1550 nm Minimum Launch Power 0 Maximum Launch Power 4 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 50 dBm Maximum Input Power 7 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 80 km 49 7 miles DOM Support Available Related Topics m Uplink Modules in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 33 m show interfaces diagnostics optics m Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 136 m Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches EX5200 and EX4200 switches have a field replaceable unit FRU up
181. is no alarm Red There is a major alarm Amber There is a minor alarm SYS System Green m Onsteadily JUNOS Software for EX Series switches has been loaded on the switch m Blinking The switch is booting MST Master Green m Onsteadily The switch is the master in the Virtual Chassis configuration m Blinking The switch is the backup in the Virtual Chassis configuration m Off The switch is a linecard member in the Virtual Chassis configuration A major alarm red indicates a critical error condition that requires immediate action A minor alarm amber indicates a noncritical condition that requires monitoring or maintenance A minor alarm that is left unchecked might cause interruption in service or performance degradation NOTE The amber glow of the Alarm LED that indicates a minor alarm closely resembles the red glow that indicates a major alarm Related Topics All three LEDs can be lit simultaneously m Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 10 m Checking Active Alarms with the J Web Interface Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches M 19 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches m Understanding Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Each network port on an EX3200 or EX4200 switch has two LEDs The four figures in this topic show the location of those LEDs m Figure 11 on page 20 shows the loc
182. is port VCP removing the uplink module breaks the setting You must reset the port as a VCP after you replace the module See Setting an Uplink Module Port as a Virtual Chassis Port CLI Procedure Before you begin removing an uplink module from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch m Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 m If there are any transceivers installed in the uplink module remove them before you remove the uplink module For instructions on removing transceivers see Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove an uplink module from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap m Cross head screwdriver provided in the uplink module kit m An antistatic bag or antistatic mat To remove an uplink module from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch 1 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis 2 Loosen the screws that secure the flip up door covering the uplink module slot on the front panel of the switch by using the cross head screwdriver provided with the uplink module kit and flip the door upward 3 Insert the ball end of the screwdriver in the keyhole on the front panel of the uplink module and slide t
183. itle and interest including copyright in and to the Software associated documentation and all copies of the Software Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a transfer or conveyance of any right title or interest in the Software or associated documentation or a sale of the Software associated documentation or copies of the Software 8 Warranty Limitation of Liability Disclaimer of Warranty The warranty applicable to the Software shall be as set forth in the warranty statement that accompanies the Software the Warranty Statement Nothing in this Agreement shall give rise to any obligation to support the Software Support services may be purchased separately Any such support shall be governed by a separate written support services agreement TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW JUNIPER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOSS OF DATA OR COSTS OR PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES OR FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT THE SOFTWARE OR ANY JUNIPER OR JUNIPER SUPPLIED SOFTWARE IN NO EVENT SHALL JUNIPER BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM UNAUTHORIZED OR IMPROPER USE OF ANY JUNIPER OR JUNIPER SUPPLIED SOFTWARE EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THE WARRANTY STATEMENT TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW JUNIPER DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES IN AND TO THE SOFTWARE WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICUL
184. itutes the entire and sole agreement between Juniper and the Customer with respect to the Software and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements relating to the Software whether oral or written including any inconsistent terms contained in a purchase order except that the terms of a separate written agreement executed by an authorized Juniper representative and Customer shall govern to the extent such terms are inconsistent or conflict with terms contained herein No modification to this Agreement nor any waiver of any rights hereunder shall be effective unless expressly assented to in writing by the party to be charged If any portion of this Agreement is held invalid the Parties agree that such invalidity shall not affect the validity of the remainder of this Agreement This Agreement and associated documentation has been written in the English language and the Parties agree that the English version will govern For Canada Les parties aux pr sent s confirment leur volont que cette convention de m me que tous les documents y compris tout avis qui s y rattach soient redig s en langue anglaise Translation The parties confirm that this Agreement and all related documentation is and will be in the English language vi Table of Contents Part 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 About This Topic Collection xxi How to WEE CR ENT TEE xxi List of EX Series Guides for JUNOS Release 101 xxi Downloading Software 2 5 hee ete tan ere ere e
185. k module is down Problem The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP transceiver is installed in an SFP uplink module installed in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is down When you check the status with the CLI command show interfaces ge or with the J Web user interface the disabled port is not listed Cause By default the SFP uplink module operates in the 10 gigabit mode and supports only SFP transceivers The operating mode for the module is incorrectly set Solution Either SFP or SFP transceivers can be installed in SFP uplink modules You must configure the operating mode of the SFP uplink module to match the type of transceiver you want to use For SFP transceivers configure the 1 0 gigabit operating mode and for SFP transceivers configure the 1 gigabit operating mode See Setting the Mode on an SFP Uplink Module CLI Procedure on page 168 Related Topics m Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 192 m Monitoring Interface Status and Traffic a Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces CLI Procedure w Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces J Web Procedure m Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 m Uplink Modules in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 33 m EX Series Switches Interfaces Overview Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches This topic provides troubleshooting informa
186. kador Related Topics m Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden for EX Series Switches on page 212 m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches on page 219 m Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 227 m Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 m Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 Fire Safety Requirements for EX Series Switches 210 m In the event of a fire emergency involving switches and other network equipment the safety of people is the primary concern You should establish procedures for protecting people in the event of a fire emergency provide safety training and properly provision fire control equipment and fire extinguishers In addition you should establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a fire emergency Juniper Networks products should be installed in an environment suitable for electronic equipment We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment and that all local fire safety and electrical codes and ordinances be observed when installing and operating your equipment Fire Suppression In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire you should first turn power off to the equipment at the source Then use a Type C
187. kroppsskada nar du installerar eller utf r underh llsarbete pa denna enhet p en st llning m ste du vidta s rskilda forsiktighetsatgarder f r att f rs kra dig om att systemet star stadigt F ljande riktlinjer ges f r att trygga din s kerhet Juniper Networks switch maste installeras i en st llning som ar f rankrad i byggnadens struktur Om denna enhet ar den enda enheten pa st llningen skall den installeras langst ned pa st llningen Om denna enhet installeras pa en delvis fylld st llning skall st llningen fyllas nedifr n och upp med de tyngsta enheterna l ngst ned p st llningen Om st llningen r f rsedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan enheten installeras eller underh lls p st llningen Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches on page 219 Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 Mounting an EX2200 Switch Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 116 Mounting an EX8208 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Mounting an EX8216 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Wall Mounting Warning for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches A WARNING When mounted in a vertical position an EX3200 or EX4200 chassis must be oriented with the front panel of the chassis pointing down to ensure proper airflow and meet safety requirements in the event of a fire Wall Mounting Warning for EX3
188. l by default However if you are using the uplink module ports as VCPs you must explicitly set the uplink module ports to function as VCPs The following illustrations describe various Virtual Chassis cabling configuration examples ES NOTE For increased availability and redundancy we recommend that you always configure your Virtual Chassis in a ring topology Figure 31 on page 103 and Figure 32 on page 104 show five EX4200 switches stacked vertically in a rack and interconnected in a ring topology using four short Virtual Chassis cables and one long Virtual Chassis cable Figure 31 EX4200 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in a Ring Topology Using Short and Long Cables Option 1 a a le S O g020113 Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches m 103 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Figure 32 EX4200 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in a Ring Topology Using Short and Long Cables Option 2 MO 9020114 Figure 55 o
189. lated Topics m Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 a Wall Mounting Warning for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 225 m Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level Surface on page 117 Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall on page 125 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches When planning the site for installing an EX5200 or EX4200 switch you must allow sufficient clearance around the installed switch see Figure 27 on page 91 Figure 27 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 24 60 9 cm 24 60 9 cm pa T m gt Clearance required 6 15 2 cm Clearance required for maintenance for airflow for maintenance A A Front of chassis d 17 Rear of chassis 17 25 g 43 18 cm 19 43 82 cm 48 2 cm T 3 l BS 3 N 6 15 2 cm S Mounting bracket for airflow m Allow atleast 6 in 15 2 cm of clearance on the side between devices that have fans or blowers installed Allow 2 8 in 7 cm between the side of the chassis and any non heat producing surface such as a wall For the cooling system to function properly the airflow around the chassis must be unrestricted Figure 28 on page 92 shows the airflow through the EX5200 switch chassis and Figure 29 on page 92 shows the airflow through the EX4200
190. link module on the front panel Table 22 on page 68 provides the uplink modules connector pinout information NOTE You can use these ports to connect an access switch to a distribution switch You can also use optional uplink module ports to connect members of a Virtual Chassis across multiple wiring closets Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 67 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 22 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Pin Number Pin Name Al GND A2 GND A3 GND A4 GND A5 GND A6 GND AT GND A8 GND A9 GND A10 GND All GND A12 GND A15 GND A14 GND A15 Uplink I2C SCK A16 GND A17 Uplink_PD A18 GND A19 POWER 12V A20 GND B1 GND B2 XAUIO_RXON B3 GND B4 XAUIO_RX2N B5 Uplink P25 LED2 B6 XAUI1_RXON B7 Uplink P27 LED2 68 HW Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 22 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Pin Number Pin Name B8 XAUI1_RX2N B9 GND B10 SRX28N B11 Uplink_XAUI_XMDIO B12 SRX26N B13 GND B14 SGMIIRXN B15 Uplink_I2C_Rst B16 Uplink_Intr B17 Upli
191. link_P28_ LED2 H9 XAUI1_RX3P H10 GND H11 SRX27P H12 Uplink XAUI MDC H13 SRX25P H14 GND H15 Serial_RX H16 GND H17 Uplink_P25_LED1 H18 Uplink_P28_LEDO H19 POWER 12V H20 POWER 12V I1 GND 12 GND Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 73 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 22 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Pin Number Pin Name I5 GND I4 GND I5 GND 16 GND I7 GND I8 GND 9 GND 0 GND 1 GND 2 GND 5 GND 4 GND 5 GND 6 Serial TX a GND 8 Uplink P28 LED 9 GND 120 POWER 12V Related Topics m Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 33 m Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 m Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 10 m Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 133 m Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 175 Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches EX4200 switches use a 68 pin connector cable to interconnect switches to form a Virtual Chassis The cable is provided with the switch Table 25 on page 75 provides the Virtual Chassis ports VCPs connector pinout information 74 W virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches Table 23 Virtual Chassis Ports VCPs Connecto
192. m to top To mount the switch on two posts in a rack 1 Place the switch on a flat stable surface 2 Align the mounting brackets along the front rear or center of the side panels of the switch chassis depending on how you want to mount the switch For example if you want to center mount the switch align the brackets along the centers of the side panel See Figure 58 on page 119 Figure 38 Attaching the Mounting Bracket Along the Front of the Switch Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rackor Cabinet m 119 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 120 m NOTE If you need to mount the switch in a recessed position use the 2 in recess front mount brackets from the separately orderable four post rack mount kit Related Topics Align the bottom holes in the mounting brackets with holes on the side panels of the switch chassis Insert mounting screws into the aligned holes Tighten the screws Ensure that the other holes in the mounting brackets are aligned with the holes in the side panels Insert a screw in each hole and tighten the screws Have one person grasp both sides of the switch lift the switch and position it in the rack aligning the mounting bracket holes with the threaded holes in the rack or cabinet rail Align the bottom hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail making sure the chassis is level See Figure 59 on page 120 Figure
193. m SFP transceivers are supported in all four ports The ports that support SFP transceivers are labeled 10 G on the uplink module s faceplate see Figure 25 on page 55 NOTE When an SFP uplink module is operating in 10 gigabit mode m Only the 10 gigabit ports ports O and 2 are enabled m You can use only SFP transceivers in those ports When an SFP uplink module is operating in 1 gigabit mode m All four ports are enabled m You can use only SFP transceivers in all four ports The SFP uplink module has an LED on the faceplate labeled Operating mode LED in Figure 25 on page 55 that indicates the operating mode If the uplink module is operating in the 10 gigabit mode the LED is lit If the uplink module is operating in the 1 gigabit mode the LED is unlit SFP uplink modules are shipped with dust covers preinstalled in the ports NOTE On an EX3200 switch if you install a transceiver in an SFP uplink module when the uplink module is operating in the 1 gigabit mode a corresponding network port from the last four built in ports is disabled For example if you install an SFP transceiver in port 2 on the uplink module ge 0 1 3 then ge 0 0 23 is disabled The disabled port is not listed in the output of show interface commands XFP Uplink Module The SFP uplink module requires JUNOS Software for EX Series switches Release 9 4 or later Figure 26 on page 57 shows the XFP uplink module which provide
194. ment JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Class of Service JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Device Security JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Ethernet Switching JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Interfaces JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Layer 5 Protocols JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 MPLS JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Multicast JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Network Management and Monitoring JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Port Security JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Routing Policy and Packet Filtering JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Spanning Tree Protocols JUNOSS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 System Setup JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 User and Access Management JUNOS Software for EX Series Switches Release 10 1 Virtual Systems xxii HW List of EX Series Guides for JUNOS Release 10 1 Downloading Software About This Topic Collection You can download JUNOS Software for EX Series switches from the Download Software area at http www juniper net customers support To download the software you must have a Juniper Networks user account For information about obtaining an accoun
195. n or capability is enabled without a key g distribute any key for the Software provided by Juniper to any third party h use the Software in any manner that extends or is broader than the uses purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller i use Embedded Software on non Juniper equipment j use Embedded Software or make it available for use on Juniper equipment that the Customer did not originally purchase from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller k disclose the results of testing or benchmarking of the Software to any third party without the prior written consent of Juniper or 1 use the Software in any manner other than as expressly provided herein 5 Audit Customer shall maintain accurate records as necessary to verify compliance with this Agreement Upon request by Juniper Customer shall furnish such records to Juniper and certify its compliance with this Agreement 6 Confidentiality The Parties agree that aspects of the Software and associated documentation are the confidential property of Juniper As such Customer shall exercise all reasonable commercial efforts to maintain the Software and associated documentation in confidence which at a minimum includes restricting access to the Software to Customer employees and contractors having a need to use the Software for Customer s internal business purposes 7 Ownership Juniper and Juniper s licensors respectively retain ownership of all right t
196. n the master keeps its member ID on reserve To make that member switch s member ID available for reassignment issue the request virtual chassis recycle command from the Virtual Chassis master S NOTE When you add or delete members in a Virtual Chassis configuration internal routing changes might cause temporary traffic loss for a few seconds Related Topics m Monitoring Virtual Chassis Configuration Status and Statistics m Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration CLI Procedure on page 105 Remove a Member Switch and Make Its Member ID Available for Reassignment to a Different Switch m 183 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 184 HN Remove a Member Switch and Make Its Member ID Available for Reassignment to a Different Switch Part 5 Switch and Component Maintenance m Routine Maintenance on page 187 Switch and Component Maintenance M 185 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 186 HN Switch and Component Maintenance Chapter 14 Routine Maintenance Maintaining Fiber Optic Cables in EX Series Switches on page 187 Maintaining Fiber Optic Cables in EX Series Switches Related Topics To maintain fiber optic cables in EX Series switches When you unplug a fiber optic cable from a transceiver place rubber safety caps over the transceiver and on the end of the cable Anchor fiber optic cable to avoid stress on the connectors When attach
197. n FRUs in an EX5200 or EX4200 SWITCH nees enee veier reti qi Tees coh nee eh heal ees aaa 199 Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series SWITCHES espe ds e ee E etse o eng 199 Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping 201 Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch for Shipping eec 201 Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping 202 Safety Information General Safety Information 207 General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches 207 Definitions of Safety Warning Levels for EX Series Switches 208 Fire Safety Requirements for EX Series Switches sssssssss 210 Qualified Personnel Warning for EX Series Switches eccerre 211 Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden for EX Series Switches 212 Radiation and Laser Warnings 213 Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches 215 General Laser Safety Guidelines sss 215 Class 1 Laser Product Warning ssssssssssss nan ncnncnnn ns 214 Class EP Product Warning ii ads 214 Laser beam Warning un tse oreet ee fm PHASE o Res 215 Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches 216 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information 219 Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches ooo 219 Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches e 220 R
198. n page 104 shows five EX4200 switches stacked vertically in a rack and interconnected in a ring topology using short length and medium length Virtual Chassis cables Figure 33 EX4200 Switches Mounted on a Single Rack and Connected in a Ring Topology Using Short and Medium Cables LI EI d 7 3 O fle of 6 gt LJ ye ef Sb 8 o Figure 54 on page 104 and Figure 55 on page 105 show five EX4200 switches mounted on the top rows of adjacent racks and interconnected in a ring topology using medium length and long length Virtual Chassis cables Figure 34 EX4200 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected in a Ring Topology Using Medium and Long Cables Option 1 DR El 9020044 104 Mm Virtual Chassis Cabling Configuration Examples for EX4200 Switches Chapter 8 Planning the Virtual Chassis Figure 35 EX4200 Switches Mounted on Adjacent Racks and Connected in a Ring Topology Using Medium and Long Cables Option 2 Related Topics m g020043 Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on page 101 Understanding Virtual Chassis Components Planning the Virtual Chassis on page 102 Virtual Chassis Ports Connec
199. n page 40 LCD Panel in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 15 Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 45 Installing and Removing EX5200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 155 Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 175 Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch The rear panel of the EX4200 switch consists of the following components Fan tray Virtual Chassis ports VCPs USB port Temperature shutdown LED Management Ethernet port Console port ESD point Power supply or power supplies Figure 7 on page 12 shows the rear panel of an EX4200 switch All EX4200 switches have the same rear panel The 520 W AC power supply and the 190 W DC are flush with the chassis The 600 W AC power supply and 950 W AC power supply extend out of the chassis by 2 25 in Power cord retainer clips extend out of the power supply by 5 in Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch m 11 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 12 m Figure 7 EX4200 Switch Rear Panel Temperature shutdown LED ESD point Protective earthing terminal on side panel O O e BRL OSO z e a C G e Ed Ei Eo oA EJES Fan Virtual USB Management Console Power tray chassis port Ethernet port Supply 1 Supply 0 ports port Related Topics m m Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page
200. nals in place b Secure the ring lug of the positive DC power source cable to the A or B terminal on the DC power supply c Secure the ring lug of the negative DC power source cable to the A or B terminal on the DC power supply d Tighten the screws on the power supply terminals until snug using the Phillips screwdriver number 2 Do not overtighten apply between 8 Ib in 0 9 Nm and 9 Ib in 1 02 Nm of torque to the screws If you have a second installed power supply connect it in the same way you did the first nu To connect one power supply to two power sources 150 HN Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Related Topics Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch a Remove the jumpers on the power supply terminal block b Secure the ring lug of the positive DC power source cable from the first DC power source to the A terminal on the first DC power supply c Secure the ring lug of the negative DC power source cable from the first DC power source to the A terminal on the first DC power supply d Secure the ring lug of the positive DC power source cable from the second DC power source to the A terminal on the second DC power supply e Secure the ring lug of the negative DC power source cable from the second DC power source to the A terminal on the second DC power supply f Tighten the screws on the power supply terminals on both the power supplies until snug usin
201. nel 4 Insert 4x6 mm Phillips flat head mounting screws into the two aligned holes and tighten the screws Ensure that the remaining four holes in the side rail brackets are aligned with the four holes in the side panel See Figure 41 on page 123 122 HN Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet Chapter 9 Installing the Switch Figure 41 Attaching the Side Rail Bracket to the Switch Chassis 5 Insert the 4x6 mm Phillips flat head mounting screws into the remaining four holes in the side rail brackets and tighten the screws 6 Have one person grasp both sides of the switch lift the switch and position it in the rack aligning the side rail bracket holes with the threaded holes in the front post of the rack Align the bottom hole in both the mounting brackets with a hole in each rack rail making sure the chassis is level See Figure 42 on page 123 Figure 42 Mounting the Switch to the Front Posts in a Rack Switch g i o d n A R ag oo z gt R e A oc LA a0 NER A L 9 Side rail Front i E bracket bracket D 7 Have a second person secure the front of the switch to the rack by using the appropriate screws for your rack 8 Slide the rear brackets into the side rail brackets See Figure 43 on page 124 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet m 123 Complete Hardware
202. nel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 EX5200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 5 Chassis Physical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches The EX5200 and EX4200 switch chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses the hardware components Table 5 on page 7 summarizes the physical specifications of the EX3200 and EX4200 switch chassis Table 3 Physical Specifications of the EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Chassis Description Value Chassis height 1 75 in 4 45 cm Chassis width 17 25 in 45 82 cm 19 in 48 2 cm with mounting brackets attached Chassis depth Without power supply installed 17 in 45 18 cm With power supply installed m 320 WAC power supply or 190 W DC power supply installed 17 in 45 18 cm m 600 W or 950 W AC power supply installed 19 25 in 48 9 cm Weight EX3200 switch with 1 power supply 15 17 Ib 6 8 7 7 kg EX4200 switch with 1 power supply 16 18 Ib 7 2 8 2 kg 320 W AC power supply 2 5 Ib 1 1 kg 600 W and 950 W AC power supplies 5 1 Ib 1 4 kg 190 W DC power supply 2 5 lb 1 1 kg Related Topics Rack Requirements for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 87 Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 89 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 116 Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 115 Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 Chassis
203. nfigure and manage an EX Series switch using a dedicated console Every EX Series switch has a console port with an RJ 45 connector Use the console port to connect the EX Series switch to the management console or to a console server The console port accepts a cable with an RJ 45 connector Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable with an RJ 45 connector available An RJ 45 cable and an RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter are supplied with the switch Figure 61 on page 155 shows the RJ 45 connector of the Ethernet cable supplied with the switch Figure 61 Ethernet Cable Connector CC um 001063 Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console m 153 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 154 m NOTE If your laptop or PC does not have a DB 9 male connector pin and you want to connect your laptop or PC directly to an EX Series switch use a combination of the RJ 45 to DB 9 female adapter supplied with the switch and a USB to DB 9 male adapter You must provide the USB to DB 9 male adapter Related Topics To connect an EX Series switch to a management console see Figure 62 on page 154 and Figure 65 on page 154 1 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable into the console port labeled CON or CONSOLE on the EX Series switch For the location of the CON CONSOLE port on different EX Series switches m See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch m See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 m See
204. nk_Pwr_En B18 Uplink_P26_LEDO B19 POWER 12V B20 POWER 12V Cl GND C2 XAUIO_RXOP C3 GND C4 XAUIO_RX2P C5 GND C6 XAUI1_RXOP C7 GND C8 XAUI1_RX2P C9 GND C10 SRX28P C11 GND C12 SRX26P C15 GND C14 SGMIIRXP Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches M 69 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 22 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Pin Number Pin Name C15 CPU UPLINK MDC C16 Uplink_I2C_SDA C17 CPU_UPLINK_MDIO C18 Uplink_P26_LED1 C19 UPLNK_PWR_OK C20 POWER 12V D1 GND D2 GND D3 XAUIO TXIN D4 GND D5 XAUIO_TX3N D6 GND D7 XAUII TXIN D8 GND D9 XAUI1_TX3N D10 GND D11 STX27N D12 GND D13 STX25N D14 GND D15 Uplink_Rst D16 GND D17 Uplink_Status_LEDO D18 GND D19 POWER 12V D20 GND El GND 70 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 22 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Pin Number Pin Name E2 XAUIO_TXO E3 XAUIO_TX1P E4 XAUIO_TX2 E5 XAUIO_TX3P E6 XAUI1_TXO E7 XAUI1_TX1P E8 XAUI1_TX2 E9 XAUI1_TX3P E10 STX28N E11 STX27P E1
205. nnect the switch to a modem Perform the initial setup and configuration of the switch See Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 or Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedure on page 165 Ensure that you have the following parts available before you begin to connect the switch to the modem A modem not provided A desktop or notebook computer not provided An RJ 45 to DB 9 adapter and an Ethernet cable provided A phone cable not provided If your computer does not have a DB 9 male connector pin a USB to DB 9 male adapter not provided An adapter to connect the RS 252 DB 25 connector on the modem to the RJ 45 to DB 9 adapter on the switch not provided This topic describes 1 2 5 Setting the Serial Console Speed for the Switch on page 155 Configuring the Modem on page 156 Connecting the Modem to the Console Port on page 157 Setting the Serial Console Speed for the Switch Before you can connect the switch to a modem the switch s serial console speed must be set to 115200 baud gt NOTE The default serial console speed is 9600 baud Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Modem WM 155 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches To change the serial console speed 1 Poweronthe switch If the switch is an EX8208 or EX8216 model see Powering On an EX8200 Switch The loader script starts 2 You are prompted with
206. nnecting an EX8208 Switch m Installing and Connecting an EX8216 Switch 86 HW Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches Chapter 5 Mounting and Clearance Requirements m Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 87 m Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 89 m Requirements for Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desktop or Wall on page 90 m Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches You can mount the switch on two post racks or four post racks Rack requirements consist of m Rack type Mounting bracket hole spacing m Rack size and strength m Rack connection to the building structure Table 27 on page 87 provides the rack requirements and specifications for the switch Table 27 Rack Requirements and Specifications for the Switch Rack Requirement Guidelines Rack type Use a four post rack or a two post rack You can mount the switch on any four post or two post rack that provides bracket holes or hole patterns spaced at 1 U 1 75 in 4 45 cm increments and that meets the size and strength requirements to support the weight AU is the standard rack unit defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association http www eia org With adequate cooling air
207. nted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack Ramp Warning for EX Series Switches M 2221 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches m When mounting the switch on a partially filled rack load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack m Ifthe rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the switch in the rack A WARNING Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel in een rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft moet u speciale voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft De onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren m De Juniper Networks switch moet in een stellage worden ge nstalleerd die aan een bouwsel is verankerd m Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het enige in het rek is m Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert dient u het rek van onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het rek m Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen dient u de stabilisatoren te monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft A WARNING Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessa on noudatettava erityisia varotoimia jarjestelman vakav
208. odule Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 192 m Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 175 m Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 156 m Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 m Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces CLI Procedure Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch m 135 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches m Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 m Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 10 Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch 136 m The SFP SFP and XFP transceivers for EX Series switches are hot removable and hot insertable field replaceable units FRUs You can remove and replace them without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions Use only optical transceivers and optical connectors purchased from Juniper Networks for your EX Series switch NOTE On an EX3200 switch if you install a transceiver in a 1 gigabit uplink module port a corresponding network port from the last four built in ports is disabled For example if you install a transceiver in the 1 gigabit uplink module port 2 ge 0 1 3 then built in port 25 ge 0 0 23 is disabled The disabled port is not listed in the output of show interface commands Before you begin installing a transceiver in an EX Series switch ensure that you have taken the necessary
209. odules either for two SFP transceivers or four SFP transceivers You configure the operating mode on the module to match the type of transceiver you want to use that is for SFP transceivers you configure the 10 gigabit operating mode and for SFP transceivers you configure the 1 gigabit operating mode By default the SFP uplink module operates in the 10 gigabit mode and supports only SFP transceivers If you have not changed the module from the default setting and you want to use SFP transceivers you do not need to configure the operating mode To set the operating mode of an SFP uplink module 1 Change the operating mode to the appropriate mode for the transceiver type you want to use by using one of the following commands edit user switch set chassis fpc 0 pic 1 sfpplus pic mode 1g edit user switch set chassis fpc 0 pic 1 sfpplus pic mode 10g 2 Ifthe switch is running m JUNOS Release 10 1 or later the changed operating mode takes effect immediately unless a port on the SFP uplink module is a Virtual Chassis port VCP If any port on the SFP uplink module is a VCP the changed operating mode does not take effect until the next reboot of the switch NOTE During the operating mode change the Packet Forwarding Engine is restarted In a Virtual Chassis configuration this means that the Flexible PIC Concentrator connection with the master is dropped and then reconnected Related Topics m JUNOS
210. of the switch You will need to edit the Virtual Chassis configuration to include the serial number of the new member switch m If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration edited the existing Virtual Chassis configuration to include the serial number of the new member switch You can specify the role of the new member switch when you add its serial number in the Virtual Chassis configuration file The parameters specified in the master Virtual Chassis configuration file are applied after the new member switch has been interconnected with its uplink VCP to an existing member switch m Confirmed that the new currently standalone switch is powered off m Prepared an existing member switch for interconnecting with the new switch through an uplink module port by configuring an uplink module port as a VCP on the existing member switch D NOTE After you have created a preprovisioned Virtual Chassis configuration you can use the autoprovisioning feature to add member switches to that configuration To add a new member switch that is going to be interconnected with the existing Virtual Chassis configuration across wiring closets 1 Power on the new switch 2 Connect a laptop or terminal to the console port of the switch or use EZSetup on the standalone switch to specify temporary identification parameters When you interconnect the new member switch with the existing Virtual Chassis configuration the master will overwrite and
211. ols available to mount the switch on four posts in a rack m Phillips screwdriver number 2 m 6 flat head 4 40 mounting screws provided with the four post rack mount kit m 12 flat head 4x6 mm Phillips mounting screws provided with the four post rack mount kit Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet m 121 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches m One pair each of flush or 2 in recess front brackets m One pair of side rail brackets m One pair of rear brackets m Screws to secure the chassis and the rear brackets to the rack not provided m Dust covers for ports for EX4200 24F switches only optional A CAUTION If you are mounting multiple units on a rack mount the heaviest unit at the bottom of the rack and mount the other units from the bottom of the rack to the top in decreasing order of the weight of the units To mount the switch on four posts in a rack 1 Attach the front brackets either the flush or the 2 in recess brackets to the side rail brackets using six 4 40 flat head Phillips mounting screws See Figure 40 on page 122 Figure 40 Attaching the Front Bracket to the Side Rail Bracket Side rail bracket Front bracket 2 Place the switch on a flat stable surface 5 Align the side rail brackets along the side panels of the switch chassis Align the two holes in the rear of the side rail brackets with the two holes on the rear of the side pa
212. om en aarde zijn verbonden en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen lassen A WARNING Varoitus Ennen kuin ty skentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden parissa ota pois kaikki korut sormukset kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan 228 1H Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information lukien Metalliesineet kuumenevat kun ne ovat yhteydessa s hk virran ja maan kanssa ja ne voivat aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liit nt napoihin WARNING Attention Avant d acc der a cet quipement connect aux lignes lectriques ter tout bijou anneaux colliers et montres compris Lorsqu ils sont branch s l alimentation et reli s la terre les objets m talliques chauffent ce qui peut provoquer des blessures graves ou souder l objet m tallique aux bornes WARNING Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Ger ten die an das Netz angeschlossen sind jeglichen Schmuck einschlie lich Ringe Ketten und Uhren abnehmen Metallgegenstande erhitzen sich wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen werden und k nnen schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlufklemmen angeschweift werden WARNING Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di alimentazione togliersi qualsiasi monile inclusi anelli collane b
213. om erh lt Um sicherzustellen da s mtlicher Strom abgestellt ist machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher f r die Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS und kleben Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS Stellung fest Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti verificare che il circuito CC non sia alimentato Per verificare che tutta l alimentazione sia scollegata OFF individuare l interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito CC mettere l interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione Advarsel Fer noen av disse prosedyrene utferes kontroller at strommen er frakoblet likestromkretsen S rg for at all strom er sl tt AV Dette gj res ved lokalisere strombryteren p brytertavlen som betjener likestremkretsen sla strambryteren AV og teipe bryterh ndtaket p strembryteren i AV stilling Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos certifique se que desligou a fonte de alimentac o de energia do circuito de corrente continua Para se assegurar que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito de corrente cont nua e coloque o na posic o OFF Desligado segurando nessa posic o a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora jAtenci n Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos comprobar que la alimentaci n del circuito de corri
214. on instructions before you connect the switch to a power source Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de voeding verbindt Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen j rjestelm n yhdist mist virtal hteeseen Attention Avant de brancher le syst me sur la source d alimentation consulter les directives d installation Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen bevor Sie das System an die Stromquelle anschlie en Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema all alimentatore Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene f r systemet kobles til str mkilden Aviso Leia as instru es de instala o antes de ligar o sistema sua fonte de energia Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches Mm 219 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches jAtenci n Ver las instrucciones de instalaci n antes de conectar el sistema a la red de alimentaci n Varning Las installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess str mf rs rjningsenhet Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch Connecting AC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 Connecting AC Power to an EX8200 Switch
215. onent Descriptions Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch The cooling system in an EX5200 switch consists of a field replaceable unit FRU fan tray with one fan see Figure 20 on page 51 The fan tray is located at the rear of the chassis and provides side to rear chassis cooling see Figure 21 on page 51 Figure 20 Fan Tray Used in an EX3200 Switch 9020059 Fan tray Figure 21 Airflow Through the EX3200 Switch Chassis Front og a o O O nu Oso a m Sc Q o fo g ui Q i Ol Mmmm 9020060 Rear Temperature sensors in the chassis monitor the temperature within the chassis The system raises an alarm if the fan fails or if the temperature inside the chassis rises above permitted levels If the temperature inside the chassis rises above the threshold the system shuts down automatically and the temperature shutdown LED on the Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch mm 31 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches rear panel is lit You can see the status of fans and the temperature from the Show Environment Status option in the Status menu in the LCD panel Related Topics m Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 m Rear P
216. onnect EX3200 and EX4200 switches to earth ground before you connect them to power For installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to connect to the earth ground For instructions on connecting earth ground see Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 An EX3200 or EX4200 switch gets additional grounding when you plug the power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using the AC power cord appropriate for your geographical location see AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 98 m Install the power supply in the chassis For instructions on installing a power supply in an EX5200 or EX4200 switch see Installing a Power Supply in an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 150 Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch NOTE Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated power source outlet To connect AC power to an EX5200 or EX4200 switch 1 Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and the screws on their faceplates are tightened Squeeze the two sides of the power cord retainer clip and insert the L shaped ends of the wire clip into the holes in the bracket on each side of the AC power cord inlet on the AC power supply faceplate see Figure 54 on page 147 Locate the power cord or cords shipped with the
217. or only 8 ports equipped for PoE All models provide ports that have 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet connectors and optional 1 gigabit small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers 1 0 gigabit small form factor 4 W EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview Uplink Modules Chapter 1 EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview pluggable SFP transceivers or 10 gigabit small form factor pluggable XFP transceivers for use with fiber connections Additionally a 24 port model provides 1 00Base FX 1000Base X SFP ports This model is typically used as a small distribution switch All EX4200 switches have dedicated 64 Gbps Virtual Chassis ports that allow you to connect the switches to each other You can also use optional uplink module ports to connect members of a Virtual Chassis across multiple wiring closets To provide carrier class reliability EX4200 switches include m Dual redundant power supplies that are field replaceable and hot swappable An optional additional connection to an external power source is also available m A field replaceable fan tray with three fans The switch remains operational if a single fan fails m Redundant Routing Engines in a Virtual Chassis configuration This redundancy enables GRES graceful Routing Engine switchover and nonstop active routing m JUNOS Software with its modular design that enables failed system processes to gracefully restart Optional uplink modules are available for all E
218. oving a Fan Tray from an EX3200 Switch 9020061 Loosen captive screw Figure 69 Removing a Fan Tray from an EX4200 Switch 9020103 Fan tray Loosen captive screws D NOTE When a fan tray is removed Fan Blower is Absent is logged in the system log and the system raises a minor alarm Related Topics m Installing a Fan Tray in an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 132 m Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch on page 31 m Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch on page 32 m Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 m Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 m Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch If your EX3200 or EX4200 switch includes an optional field replaceable unit FRU uplink module it is installed in the switch s front panel The different types of uplink modules are described in Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 55 Removing an Uplink Module from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch m 175 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches The uplink module in EX3200 and EX4200 switches is a hot removable and hot insertable FRU You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions D NOTE If you have set an uplink module port as a Virtual Chass
219. ovisioned Virtual Chassis Configuration Using Autoprovisioning Before you begin be sure you have Installed the uplink modules needed for the Virtual Chassis configuration Mounted the new switch in a rack Ensured that the preprovisioned Virtual Chassis configuration has an active master For more information see Example Configuring a Virtual Chassis Using a Preprovisioned Configuration File On the master configured the Link Level Discovery Protocol LLDP on the uplink module ports that will be used as VCPs LLDP is configured by default but might have been disabled To configure LLDP see Configuring LLDP CLI Procedure or Configuring LLDP J Web Procedure Ensured that the new member switch has the factory default configuration If the new member switch has been previously configured revert its configuration to the factory defaults See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch Made a note of the serial number on the back of the switch You will need to edit the Virtual Chassis configuration to include the serial number of the new member switch Edited the existing Virtual Chassis preprovisioned configuration to include the serial number of the new member switch You can specify the role of the new member switch when you add its serial number to the Virtual Chassis configuration file The parameters specified in the master Virtual Chassis configuration file are applied to the new member switch
220. pound key for an existing case or press the star key to be routed to the next available support engineer The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return of the component m Packing an EX2200 Switch or Component for Shipping m Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping on page 201 m Packing an EX8200 Switch or Component m Returning an EX2200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement 200 1H Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components m Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 197 m Returning an EX8200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping If you are returning a switch or component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement pack the item as described in this topic Before you begin packing an EX5200 and EX4200 switch or component ensure that you have m Taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 m Retrieved the original shipping carton and packing materials Contact your JTAC representative if you do not have these materials to learn about approved packing materials See Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Se
221. power disturbances the intrabuilding ports must not be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring The intrabuilding ports on the switch are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection for connecting these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches E 235 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches A CAUTION Before removing or installing components of a switch attach an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare wrist Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the switch m Install the EX Series switch in compliance with the following local national and international electrical codes m United States National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 United States National Electrical Code m Other countries International Electromechanical Commission IEC 60364 Part 1 through Part 7 m Evaluated to the TN power system Canada Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 CSA C22 1 m Locate the emergency power off switch for the room in which you are working so that if an electrical accident occurs you can quickly turn off the power m Make sure that grounding surfaces are cleaned and brought to a bright finish before grounding connections are made m Do not work
222. power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord appropriate for your geographical location See AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 98 Before you connect earth ground to the protective earthing terminal on an EX4200 switch ensure that you have the following parts and tools available Grounding cable for your EX4200 switch The grounding cable must be minimum 14 AWG 2 mm minimum 90 C wire or as permitted by the local code Grounding lug for your grounding cable Washers and 10 32x 25 in screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal Phillips screwdriver number 2 To connect earth ground to an EX4200 switch Tu Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground such as the rack in which the switch is mounted Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing terminal See Figure 52 on page 141 If you mounted an EX4200 switch on four posts of a rack using the four post rack mount kit the protective earthing terminal on the switch is accessible through the slot on the left rear bracket See Figure 55 on page 144 NOTE The protective earthing terminal on an EX4200 switch mounted on four posts is available only if the rack is 27 5 in deep through 50 5 in deep for a switch mounted flush with the rack front and 29 5 in deep through 32 5 in deep for a switch mounted 2 in rece
223. precautions for safe handling of lasers see Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 213 Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver Figure 50 on page 157 shows how to install an SFP transceiver The procedure is the same for all transceiver types To install a transceiver in an EX Series switch CAUTION To avoid electrostatic discharge ESD damage to the transceiver do not touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver 1 Remove the transceiver from its bag 2 Check to see whether the transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap If it is not cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap WARNING Do not leave a fiber optic transceiver uncovered except when inserting or removing a cable The rubber safety cap keeps the port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light 5 If the port in which you want to install the transceiver is covered with a dust cover remove the dust cover and save it in case you need to cover the port later If you are hot swapping a transceiver wait for at least 10 seconds after removing the transceiver from the port before installing a transceiver Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch Chapter 10 Installing Switch Components 4 Using both hands carefully place the transceiver in the empty port The connectors must face the switch chassis A CAUTION Before you slide the transceiver
224. r EN 60825 1 requirements Observe the following guidelines and warnings m General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 215 m Class 1 Laser Product Warning on page 214 m Class 1 LED Product Warning on page 214 m Laser Beam Warning on page 215 General Laser Safety Guidelines When working around ports that support optical transceivers observe the following safety guidelines to prevent eye injury m Donot look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources m Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments m Avoid direct exposure to the beam LN WARNING Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation The lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina so focusing the eye directly on a laser source even a low power laser could permanently damage the eye Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches Mm 213 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Class 1 Laser Product Warning EN WARNING Class 1 laser product Waarschuwing Klasse 1 laser produkt Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote Attention Produit laser de classe I Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1 EN WARNING Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1 Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1 Aviso Produto laser de classe 1 jAtenci n Producto l ser Clase I Varning Laserprodukt av klass 1 Class 1 LED Product Warning AA WARNING Clas
225. r Pinout Information Chapter 3 Component Specifications Pin Number Pin Name Al GND A2 P1TXPO A3 P1TXNO A4 GND A5 P1TXP1 A6 P1TXN1 AT GND A8 P1TXP2 A9 P1TXN2 A10 GND All P1TXP3 A12 P1TXN3 A15 GND A14 NC A15 NC A16 GND A17 C A18 NC A19 NC A20 NC A21 NC A22 GND A25 P2TXPO A24 P2TXNO A25 GND A26 P2TXP1 A27 P2TXN1 Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches BR 75 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 23 Virtual Chassis Ports VCPs Connector Pinout Information continued Pin Number Pin Name A28 GND A29 P2TXP2 A50 P2TXN2 A51 GND A32 P2TXP3 A55 P2TXN5 A54 GND B1 GND B2 P1RXPO B3 P1RXNO B4 GND B5 P1RXP1 B6 PIRXNI B7 GND B8 P1RXP2 B9 P1RXN2 B10 GND B11 P1RXP3 B12 P1RXN5 B13 GND B14 C B15 C B16 C B17 C B18 C B19 C B20 C 76 MW Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 23 Virtual Chassis Ports VCPs Connector Pinout Information continued Pin Number Pin Name B21 NC B22 GND B25 P2RXPO B24 P2RXNO B25 GND B26 P2RXP1 B27 P2RXN1 B28 GND B29 P2RXP2 B30 P2RXN2 B31 GND B32 P2RXP3 B33 P2RXN3 B34 GND
226. r Repair or Replacement m 197 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics m EX5200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 5 Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement you must locate the serial number of the switch or component You must provide the serial number to the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC when you contact them to obtain Return Materials Authorization RMA If the switch is operational and you can access the CLI you can list serial numbers for the switch and for some components with a CLI command If you do not have access to the CLI or if the serial number for the component does not appear in the command output you can locate the serial number ID label on the physical switch or component see Figure 74 on page 199 and Figure 75 on page 199 E NOTE If you want to find the serial number on the physical switch component you will need to remove the component from the switch chassis for which you must have the required parts and tools available m Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI on page 198 m Locating the Chassis Serial Number ID Label on an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 198 m Locating the Serial Number ID Labels on FRUs in an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 199 Listing the Switch and Components Deta
227. r net support requesting support html XXVi amp Requesting Technical Support Part 1 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications m EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview on page 5 m Component Descriptions on page 15 m Component Specifications on page 59 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications WM 1 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 2 W Switch and Components Overview and Specifications Chapter 1 EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Overview EX5200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 5 EX5200 Switch Models on page 6 EX4200 Switch Models on page 6 Chassis Physical Specifications for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 7 Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 Rear Panel of an EX5200 Switch on page 9 Front Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 10 Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview Juniper Networks EX Series Ethernet Switches provide scalable connectivity for the enterprise market including branch offices campus locations and data centers The switches run under the Juniper Networks JUNOS Software which provides Layer 2 and Layer 5 switching routing and security services The same JUNOS code base that runs on EX Series switches also runs on all Juniper Networks J Series M Series MX Series and T Series routers EX5200 and EX4200 Switch Types on page 5 EX5200 Switches on page 4 EX4200 Switches on page 4 Uplink Mo
228. ra occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti WARNING Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan f re til personskade F r du utf rer arbeid p utstyr m du vare oppmerksom p de faremomentene som elektriske kretser inneb rer samt gj re deg kjent med vanlig praksis n r det gjelder unng ulykker Definitions of Safety Warning Levels for EX Series Switches m 209 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches WARNING Aviso Este s mbolo de aviso indica perigo Encontra se numa situa o que Ihe poder causar danos f sicos Antes de comecar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento familiarize se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos el ctricos e com quaisquer pr ticas comuns que possam prevenir poss veis acidentes WARNING jAtenci n Este s mbolo de aviso significa peligro Existe riesgo para su integridad f sica Antes de manipular cualquier equipo considerar los riesgos que entra a la corriente el ctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos est ndar de prevenci n de accidentes WARNING Varning Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada Innan du utf r arbete pa nagon utrustning m ste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och k nna till vanligt f rfarande f r att f rebygga s
229. raccialetti ed orologi Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di alimentazione e massa possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo pu saldarsi ai terminali WARNING Advarsel Fjern alle smykker inkludert ringer halskjeder og klokker for du skal arbeide pa utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger Metallgjenstander som er koblet til kraftledninger og jord blir svaert varme og kan for rsake alvorlige brannskader eller smelte fast til polene WARNING Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de corrente retire todas as j ias que estiver a usar incluindo an is fios e rel gios Os objectos met licos aquecer o em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligac o terra podendo causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais WARNING jAtenci n Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a l neas de alimentaci n quitarse las joyas incluidos anillos collares y relojes Los objetos de metal se calientan cuando se conectan a la alimentaci n y a tierra lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras graves o que los objetos met licos queden soldados a los bornes Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches Mm 229 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches A WARNING Varning Tag av alla smycken inklusive ringar halsband och armbandsur innan du arbetar pa utrustning som ar kopplad
230. rating in 10 gigabit mode m Only the 10 gigabit ports ports O and 2 are enabled m You can use only SFP transceivers in those ports When an SFP uplink module is operating in 1 gigabit mode m All four ports are enabled m You can use only SFP transceivers in all four ports Before you begin installing an uplink module in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install an uplink module in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap m Cross head screwdriver provided in the uplink module kit To install an uplink module in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch see Figure 49 on page 135 1 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis 2 Loosen the screws that secure the flip up door covering the empty uplink module slot on the front panel of the switch by using the cross head screwdriver flip the door upward and remove the blanking panel covering the empty uplink module slot NOTE If you are removing an uplink module and installing another uplink module wait for at least 10 seconds after removing the uplink module before installing the new or the same uplink module If you do not wait for at least
231. re on page 165 m Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 29 Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 148 m The power supply in an EX5200 or EX4200 switch is a hot removable and hot insertable field replaceable unit FRU located on the rear panel You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions Figure 56 DC Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Locking lever Terminal block 9020202 Handle Fan exhaust A WARNING DC powered EX3200 and EX4200 switches are intended for installation only in a restricted access location Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to connect DC power to an EX3200 or EX4200 switch m DC power source cables 12 14 AWG with ring lug Molex 190700067 or equivalent not provided Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch m Phillips screwdriver number 2 Before you begin connecting DC power to an EX5200 or EX4200 switch m Ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 m Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground CAUTION Before you connect power
232. rectamente a las aperturas para no exponerse a la radiaci n WARNING Varning Osynlig str lning kan avges fr n en port ppning utan ansluten fiberkabel och du bor d rf r undvika att bli utsatt for stralning genom att inte stirra in i oskyddade ppningar Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 m Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches on page 219 m Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches WN 217 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 218 1H Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information m Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches on page 219 m Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 220 m Ramp Warning for EX Series Switches on page 221 m Rack Mounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 221 a Wall Mounting Warning for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 225 m Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 m Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 227 Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches WARNING Read the installati
233. ries Switches on page 199 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to pack an EX3200 or EX4200 switch m Antistatic bag one for each component m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap m Phillips screwdriver number 2 This topic describes m Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch for Shipping on page 201 m Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping on page 202 Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch for Shipping To pack a switch for shipping 1 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the switch is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 2 On the console or other management device connected to the switch to the master switch in a Virtual Chassis configuration enter the CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the switch software user switch gt request system halt Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted For information about the request system halt command see the Packing an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping m 2021 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches JUNOS Software System Basics and Services Command Reference at http www juniper net te
234. rn individual components in separate boxes if they do not fit together on one level in the shipping box To pack and ship EX Series switch components Related Topics m Place individual boards in antistatic bags Ensure that the components are adequately protected with packing materials and packed so that the pieces are prevented from moving around inside the carton Close the top of the cardboard shipping box and seal it with packing tape Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking Returning an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 197 Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 174 Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 172 Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components m Removing an Uplink Module from an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 175 m Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping m 203 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 204 1H Packing EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Components for Shipping Part 8 Safety Information m General Safety Information on page 207 m Radiation and Laser Warnings on page 215 m Installation and Maintenance Safety Information on page 219 m Power and Electrical Safety Information on page 235 Safety Information m 205 Comple
235. ropriate for your geographical location See AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX8200 Switch Before you connect earth ground to the protective earthing terminal on an EX8216 switch ensure that you have the following parts and tools available Grounding cable for your EX8216 switch The grounding cable must be 2 AWG 55 6 mm minimum 60 C wire or as permitted by the local code Grounding lug for your grounding cable See Grounding Cable and Lug Specifications for EX8200 Switches Washers and 4 20x 5 8 in screws to secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal Phillips screwdriver number 2 To connect earth ground to an EX8216 switch 1 Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground such as the rack in which the switch is mounted Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing terminal See Figure 52 on page 141 Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with screws Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other switch components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch Connecting AC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8216 Switch m 145 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches m Connecting AC Pow
236. rounding conductor to the chassis use the protective earthing terminal on the EX Series switch chassis to connect to the earth ground see Figure 52 on page 141 Figure 52 Connecting a Grounding Cable to an EX Series Switch Grounding lug Screw d with split Ke washer 9020647 Before you connect earth ground to the protective earthing terminal of an EX Series switch ensure that a licensed electrician has attached an appropriate grounding lug to the grounding cable Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch m 141 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches A CAUTION Using a grounding cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch Follow the procedure that applies to your switch m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX2200 or EX3200 Switch on page 142 m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX4200 Switch on page 142 m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8208 Switch on page 144 m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8216 Switch on page 145 Connecting Earth Ground to an EX2200 or EX3200 Switch The protective earthing terminal is located on the rear of the chassis in an EX2200 switch and in an EX3200 switch An AC powered EX Series switch chassis gets additional grounding when you plug the power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord appropriate for your geographical location For EX2200 switches see AC Power Cord Specifications for EX2200 Switc
237. rsad s sont n cessaires utiliser des douilles terminales homologu es telles que celles circuit ferm ou du type plage ouverte avec cosses rebrouss es Ces douilles terminales doivent tre de la taille qui convient aux fils et doivent tre referm es sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist sind zugelassene Verdrahtungsabschl sse z B f r einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelf rmig DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning for EX Series Switches Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden Diese Abschl sse sollten die angemessene Gr e f r die Dr hte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den Leiter festklemmen Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce usare connettori omologati come quelli a occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l alto I connettori devono avere la misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l isolante che il conduttore Advarsel Hvis det er n dvendig med flertr dede ledninger brukes godkjente ledningsavslutninger som for eksempel lukket sloyfe eller spadetype med oppoverbgyde kabelsko Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig sterrelse i forhold til ledningene og skal klemme sammen b de isolasjonen og lederen Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalacao el ctrica de cabo torcido use termina es de cabo aprovadas tais como termina es de cabo em circuito
238. rt 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches m 255 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures m Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna m Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver m Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected m Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help Non Regulatory Environmental Standards Related Topics NEBS compliance These EX Series switch models are Network Equipment Building System NEBS compliant m EX2200 24T and EX2200 48T m EX3200 24T EX3200 48T EX4200 24F EX4200 24T and EX4200 48T m All EX8200 models Those switch models meet the following NEBS compliance standards m SR 3580
239. s A major alarm red indicates a critical error condition that requires immediate action A minor alarm amber indicates a noncritical condition that requires monitoring or maintenance A minor alarm that is left unchecked might cause interruption in service or performance degradation Related Topics NOTE The amber glow of the Alarm LED that indicates a minor alarm closely resembles the red glow that indicates a major alarm All three LEDs can be lit simultaneously m Front Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 8 m Checking Active Alarms with the J Web Interface m Understanding Alarm Types and Severity Levels on EX Series Switches Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches 18 m The front panel of an EX4200 switch has three LEDs on the far right side of the panel next to the LCD panel see Figure 10 on page 19 Chassis Status LEDs in EX4200 Switches Chapter 2 Component Descriptions Figure 10 Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch LCD Menu Enter Chassis panel button button status LEDs OAM Osvs OMST 9020093 Table 6 on page 19 describes the chassis status LEDs in an EX4200 switch their colors and states and the status they indicate You can view the colors of the three LEDs remotely through the CLI by issuing the operational mode command show chassis Icd Table 6 Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch LED Label Color State and Description ALM Alarm Unlit There
240. s 1 LED product Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED product Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I Warnung Class 1 LED Produktwarnung LN WARNING Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1 Advarsel LED produkt i klasse 1 Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED 214 m Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches Chapter 18 Radiation and Laser Warnings jAtenci n Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1 Varning Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1 Laser Beam Warning LS WARNING Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical instruments WARNING Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met optische instrumenten WARNING Varoitus Ala katso s teeseen l k tarkastele sit suoraan optisen laitteen avulla WARNING Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux ni l observer directement l aide d instruments optiques WARNING Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen Ger ten pr fen WARNING Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi n usare strumenti ottici per osservarlo direttamente WARNING Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter WARNING Aviso N o olhe fixamente para o raio nem olhe para ele directamente com instrumentos pticos 3 WARNING jAtenci n No mirar fijamente
241. s Switch to a Management Console on page 153 Related Topics m Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 42 m Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch on page 41 m Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 m Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 Network Cable Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 95 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 96 1H Network Cable Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 7 Planning Power Requirements m Power Specifications for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 97 m AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 98 Power Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches This topic describes power specifications for power supplies for EX3200 and EX4200 switches Table 29 on page 97 provides the AC power supply electrical specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 switches Table 50 on page 97 provides the DC power supply electrical specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 switches Table 29 AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Item Specification AC input voltage 100 through 240 VAC AC input line frequency 50 through 60 Hz AC system current rating m 4A for switches with 8 ports equipped for Power over Ethernet PoE or the switch with 24 100Base FX 1000Base SX SFP ports 7 A for switches with 24 ports equipped for PoE
242. s Switches Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information WARNING Varning Vid aska skall du aldrig utf ra arbete pa systemet eller ansluta eller koppla loss kablar Operating Temperature Warning A WARNING To prevent the switch from overheating do not operate it in an area that exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature of 104 F 40 C To prevent airflow restriction allow at least 6 in 15 2 cm of clearance around the ventilation openings WARNING Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke switch van de Juniper Networks router dan ook oververhit raakt dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats waar de maximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40 C wordt overschreden Om te voorkomen dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt dient er minstens 15 2 cm speling rond de ventilatie openingen te zijn WARNING Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks switch sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi sita ei saa k ytt tilassa jonka l mp tila ylitt korkeimman suositellun ymp rist l mp tilan 40 C Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi tuuletusaukkojen ymp rille on j tett v ainakin 15 2 cm tilaa WARNING Attention Pour viter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper Networks switch ne l utilisez pas dans une zone o la temp rature ambiante est sup rieure 40 C Pour permettre un flot d air constant d gagez un espace d au moins 15 2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations WARNIN
243. s er 48 V til 48 V RTN til RTN jord til jord Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados en el extremo del cableado Al conectar potencia la secuencia apropiada del cableado se muele para moler 4 RTN a RTN entonces 48 V a 48 V Al desconectar potencia la secuencia apropiada del cableado es 48 V a 48 V RTN a RTN entonces moli para moler Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por ltimo Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por ltimo DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning for EX Series Switches m 245 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Atenci n Wire a fonte de alimenta o de DC Usando os tal es apropriados na extremidade da fia o Ao conectar a pot ncia a seq ncia apropriada da fia o mo da para moer RTN a RTN ent o 48 V a 48 V Ao desconectar a pot ncia a seq ncia apropriada da fia o 48 V a 48 V RTN a RTN moeu ent o para moer Anote que o fio terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por ltimo Anote que o fio terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por ltimo Varning Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord RTN till RTN 48 V till 48 V Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar 48 V till 48 V RTN till RTN jord till jord Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines
244. s for EX Series Switches on page 258 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies Warning for EX4200 Switches EX4200 switches have a redundant power supply When you have redundant power supplies in a switch you must connect each power supply to a different input power source Failure to do so makes the switch susceptible to total power failure if one of the power supplies fails 240 m Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information NRE WR Juniper Networks 21 7S AE IAS LTE AI FE eI AP 8 EE AN E Wio APE GRE Juniper Networks 12 5 Pit Fa HE je ALIS A O HE c D Gu Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 238 DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches The following electrical safety guidelines apply to a DC powered switch m ADC powered switch is equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the power requirements of a maximally configured switch ke NOTE To supply sufficient power terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC DIV p p g y source capable of supplying at least 8 A at 48 VDC for EX5200 and EX4200 switches
245. s in a cabinet with a two post or four post rack that has at least 42 U of usable vertical space In all cases the rack must meet the strength requirements to support the weight m The minimum total clearance inside the cabinet is 29 2 in 74 17 cm between the inside of the front door and the inside of the rear door Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 89 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 28 Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for the Switch continued Cabinet Requirement Guidelines Cabinet airflow requirements When you mount the switch in a cabinet ensure that ventilation through the cabinet is sufficient to preven overheating m Ensure that the cool air supply you provide through the cabinet adequately dissipates the thermal output of the switch or switches m Ensure that the cabinet allows the chassis hot exhaust air to exit the cabinet without recirculating into the switch An open cabinet without a top or doors that employs hot air exhaust extraction from the top allows the best airflow through the chassis If the cabinet contains a top or doors perforations in these elements assist with removing the hot air exhaust m The switch fans exhaust hot air through the rear of the chassis Install the switch in the cabinet in a way that maximizes the open space on the fan tray side of the chassis This maximizes the clearance for critical airflo
246. s two ports for 10 gigabit XFP transceivers 36 1H Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Related Topics Chapter 2 Component Descriptions Figure 26 XFP Uplink Module Status LED Status LED 9020108 Link Activity Link Activity LED LED XFP uplink modules are shipped with a dust cover preinstalled in one port The XFP uplink module requires JUNOS Software for EX Series switches Release 9 0 or later m Network Port LEDs in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 20 m Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 67 m Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 43 m Example Configuring Aggregated Ethernet High Speed Uplinks Between a Virtual Chassis Access Switch and a Virtual Chassis Distribution Switch m Example Configuring Aggregated Ethernet High Speed Uplinks with LACP Between a Virtual Chassis Access Switch and a Virtual Chassis Distribution Switch m Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 133 m Troubleshooting Uplink Module Installation or Replacement on EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 192 Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches mm 37 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 38 MH Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications m USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch on page 59 m Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an E
247. s you click or select m In the Logical Interfaces box select All Interfaces m To cancel the configuration click Cancel gt bold right angle bracket Separates levels in a hierarchy of J Web selections In the configuration editor hierarchy select Protocols gt Ospf xxiv Wi Documentation Symbols Key About This Topic Collection Documentation Feedback We encourage you to provide feedback comments and suggestions so that we can improve the documentation Send e mail to techpubs comments juniper net with the following m Document URL or title m Page number if applicable m Software version m Your name and company Requesting Technical Support Technical product support is available through the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC If you are a customer with an active J Care or JNASC support contract or are covered under warranty and need post sales technical support you can access our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC JTAC policies For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies review the JTAC User Guide located at http www juniper net customers support downloads 7100059 EN pdf Product warranties For product warranty information visit http www juniper net support warranty JTAC hours of operation The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours a day 7 days a week 565 days a year Self Help Online Tools and Resources
248. sceiver in an SFP or SFP uplink module installed in an EX3200 switch a corresponding base port from the last four built in ports is disabled If you need to use the disabled built in port you must remove the transceiver from the SFP or SFP uplink module Alternatively you can install an XFP uplink module instead of an SFP or SFP uplink module There is no conflict between the built in network ports and the ports on the XFP uplink modules m Monitoring Interface Status and Traffic mw Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces CLI Procedure w Configuring Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces J Web Procedure m Installing an Uplink Module in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 133 m Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 177 m Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 33 m Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on page 101 One of the last four network ports on an EX3200 switch with an SFP or SFP uplink module installed is disabled m 193 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 194 Mm One ofthe last four network ports on an EX3200 switch with an SFP or SFP uplink module installed is disabled Part 7 Returning Hardware m Returning the Switch or Switch Components on page 197 Returning Hardware m 195 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 196 1H Returning Hardware Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components m
249. side as shown in Figure 44 on page 126 Figure 44 Attaching Wall Mount Brackets to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chassis Rear panel 9020200 Et Front panel 2 If you are mounting two switches together line the second switch on top of the first and attach it to the mounting brackets using two wall mount bracket screws on each side see Figure 45 on page 127 5 Insert the mounting screws in the wall Insert the top pair of mounting screws 474 55 mm apart and insert the second pair of mounting screws 151 81 mm directly below the first set If the mounting screws are inserted in wall board with no stud behind it you must use dry wall anchors rated to support 75 Ib 54 kg Insert the screws into wall studs wherever possible to provide added support for the chassis Screw the screws only part way in leaving about 1 4 in 6 mm distance between the head of the screw and the wall 4 Grasp each side of the switch or switches lift the switch or switches and hang the brackets from the mounting screws as shown in Figure 45 on page 127 126 HN Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall Chapter 9 Installing the Switch Figure 45 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall oo Rear panel _ Hang attached brackets on wall mounted screws 9020201 Front panel 5 Tighten the mounting scr
250. sis Before mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on a desk or other level surface m Verify that the site meets the requirements described in Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 81 m Place the desk in its permanent location allowing adequate clearance for airflow and maintenance and secure it to the building structure m Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 with particular attention to Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 220 m Remove the switch from the shipping carton see Unpacking an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 114 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to mount the switch on a desk or other level surface m Phillips screwdriver number 2 m 4 rubber feet to stabilize the chassis on the a desk or other level surface provided in the accessory box shipped with the switch m Dust covers for ports for EX4200 24F switches only optional To mount the switch on a desk or other level surface 1 Turn the chassis upside down on the desk or the level surface where you intend to mount the switch 2 Attach the rubber feet to the bottom of the chassis as shown in Figure 57 on page 118 5 Turn the chassis right side up on the desk or the level surface 4 lfitis an EX4200 24F switch we recommend you insert dust covers in unused SFP ports Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switc
251. so avoimiin aukkoihin WARNING Attention Des radiations invisibles l il nu pouvant traverser l ouverture du port lorsqu aucun c ble en fibre optique n y est connect il est recommand de ne pas regarder fixement l int rieur de ces ouvertures WARNING Warnung Aus der Port ffnung k nnen unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren wenn kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist Vermeiden Sie es sich den Strahlungen auszusetzen und starren Sie nicht in die ffnungen 216 Mm Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches Chapter 18 Radiation and Laser Warnings WARNING Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti radiazioni invisibili possono essere emesse attraverso l apertura della porta Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture WARNING Advarsel Unnga utsettelse for str ling og stirr ikke inn i pninger som er apne fordi usynlig str ling kan emiteres fra portens apning nar det ikke er tilkoblet en fiberkabel WARNING Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emiss o de radia o invis vel atrav s do orif cio da via de acesso quando esta n o tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado dever evitar a exposic o radiac o e n o dever olhar fixamente para orif cios que se encontrarem a descoberto WARNING jAtenci n Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiaci n invisible cuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado evite mirar di
252. ssed from the rack front Connecting Earth Ground to an EX4200 Switch m 143 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Figure 53 Connecting the Grounding Lug to an EX4200 Switch on a Four Post Rack Protective Side rail earthing terminal bracket let f WW OOOO Ogi Op dU Wo d P 0 gt nor 00 00 RR T eener Hi og Vid EN Rear bracket NOTE The brackets must be attached to the chassis before the grounding lug is attached The brackets are shown pulled away from the chassis so that the protective earthing terminal can be seen Grounding lug 9004479 5 Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with screws 4 Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other switch components and that it does not drape where people could trip over it Connecting Earth Ground to an EX8208 Switch 144 m The protective earthing terminal is located on the left side of the chassis in an EX8208 switch An AC powered EX Series switch chassis gets additional grounding when you plug the power supply in the switch into a grounded AC power outlet by using an AC power cord appropriate for your geographical location See AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX8200 Switch Before you connect earth ground to the protective earthing terminal on an EX8208 switch ensure that you have the following parts and tools available m Groun
253. stos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por personal t cnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado Varning Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och kvalificerad personal Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 258 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 241 Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden for EX Series Switches A WARNING The equipment must be connected to an earthed mains socket outlet Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt Varning Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat n tuttag Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 212 HN Warming Statement for Norway and Sweden for EX Series Switches Chapter 18 Radiation and Laser Warnings m Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 m Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning for EX Series Switches on page 216 Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches EX Series switches are equipped with laser transmitters which are considered a Class 1 Laser Product by the U S Food and Drug Administration and are evaluated as a Class 1 Laser Product pe
254. switch the cords have plugs appropriate for your geographical location See AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 98 WARNING Ensure that the power cord does not block access to switch components or drape where people can trip on it oO 0 N OD Insert the coupler end of the power cord into the AC power cord inlet on the AC power supply faceplate Push the cord into the slot in the adjustment nut of the power cord retainer Turn the nut until it is tight against the base of the coupler and the slot in the nut is turned 90 from the top of the switch see Figure 55 on page 148 If the AC power source outlet has a power switch set it to the OFF 0 position Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source outlet If the AC power source outlet has a power switch set it to the ON position Verify that the AC OK LED on the power supply is lit and is on steadily Figure 54 Connecting the AC Power Cord Retainer Clip to an AC Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch g020068 Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch M 147 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Figure 55 Connecting an AC Power Cord to an AC Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Tighten adjustment nut 9020085 Related Topics m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch CLI Procedure on page 161 m Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch J Web Procedu
255. t see http www juniper net entitlement setupAccountInfo do Documentation Symbols Key Notice Icons Icon Meaning Description Informational note Indicates important features or instructions Caution Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware damage Warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death Laser warning e Pp Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser Text and Syntax Conventions Convention Description Examples Bold text like this Represents text that you type To enter configuration mode type the configure command user host gt configure Fixed width text like this Represents output that appears on the terminal screen user host gt show chassis alarms No alarms currently active Italic text like this Introduces important new terms Identifies book names Identifies RFC and Internet draft titles m A policy term is a named structure that defines match conditions and actions m JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide m RFC 1997 BGP Communities Attribute Downloading Software MM xxiii Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Text and Syntax Conventions Convention Description Examples Italic text like this Represents variables options for which you substitute a value in commands or configuration statements Configure
256. t niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden Varoitus l k yt sellaista kaltevaa pintaa jonka kaltevuus ylitt 10 astetta Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l inclinaison est sup rieure 10 degr s Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader Aviso N o utilize uma rampa com uma inclina o superior a 10 graus jAtenci n No usar una rampa inclinada m s de 10 grados Varning Anvand inte ramp med en lutning pa mer an 10 grader m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 215 m Installation Instructions Warning for EX Series Switches on page 219 m Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 Rack Mounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches Ensure that the rack or cabinet in which the EX Series switch is installed is evenly and securely supported Uneven mechanical loading could lead to a hazardous condition WARNING To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the switch in a rack take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following directives help maintain your safety m The switch must be installed in a rack that is secured to the building structure m The switch should be mou
257. t remain in the chassis for proper airflow To remove a power supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 switch see Figure 67 on page 173 1 Place the antistatic bag or the antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 2 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components 5 Disconnect power to the switch by performing one of the following m AC power supply If the AC power source outlet has a power switch set it to the OFF 0 position If the AC power source outlet does not have a power switch gently pull out the male end of the power cord connected to the power source outlet m DC power supply Switch the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit to the OFF position 4 Remove the power source cable from the power supply faceplate m AC power supply Gently pull out the female end of the power cord connected to the power supply faceplate m DC power supply Remove the screws securing the ring lugs attached to the power source cables to the power supply using the Phillips screwdriver number 2 and remove the power source cables from the power supply Replace the screws on the terminals and tighten them 5 Loosen the locking lever screw on the left front of the power supply by using the Phillips screwdriver number 2 6 P
258. t to mount the switch in a recessed position Reasons that you might want to mount the switch in a recessed position include You are mounting the switch in a cabinet and the cabinet doors will not close completely unless the switch is recessed 124 HN Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cabinet Chapter 9 Installing the Switch The switch you are mounting has an uplink module with transceivers installed in it the transceivers in the uplink module ports protrude from the front of the switch To mount the switch in a recessed position on four posts follow the instructions in Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 121 To mount the switch in a recessed position on two posts follow the instructions in Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 118 Related Topics m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 Rack Mounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 221 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall You can mount an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on a wall by using the separately orderable wall mount kit Before mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 switch on a wall Verify that the site meets the requirements described in Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 81 Read General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 20
259. tal Tolerances Description Tolerance Altitude No performance degradation to 10 000 feet 5048 meters Relative humidity Normal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 10 through 85 noncondensing Temperature EX2200 EX5200 and EX4200 switches Normal operation ensured in temperature range of 32 F through 115 F 0 C through 45 C EX8208 and EX8216 switches Normal operation ensured in temperature range of 52 F through 104 F 0 C through 40 C Seismic Complies with Zone 4 earthquake requirements as per GR 65 Issue ES NOTE Install EX Series switches only in restricted areas such as dedicated equipment rooms and equipment closets in accordance with Articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Related Topics Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX2200 Switches Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX5200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX8208 Switch Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches m 85 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches m Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX8216 Switch m Installing and Connecting an EX2200 Switch m Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 113 m Installing and Co
260. tally caused equipment failures Related Topics m Keep the area around the chassis free from dust and conductive material such as metal flakes Follow prescribed airflow guidelines to ensure that the cooling system functions properly and that exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the switch Follow the prescribed ESD prevention procedures to avoid damaging the equipment Static discharge can cause components to fail completely or intermittently over time Install the switch in a secure area so that only authorized personnel can access the switch Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX2200 Switches Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX8208 Switch Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX8216 Switch Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches on page 85 Installing and Connecting an EX2200 Switch Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 115 Installing and Connecting an EX8208 Switch Installing and Connecting an EX8216 Switch Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines for EX Series Switches Table 25 on page 84 describes the factors you must consider while planning the electrical wiring at your
261. tches shows two lines of text each a maximum of 16 characters in length The LCD panel displays a variety of information about the switch and also provides a menu to perform basic operations such as initial setup and reboot There are two navigation buttons Menu and Enter to the right of the LCD panel See Figure 8 on page 15 Figure 8 LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches LCD Menu Enter Chassis panel button button status LEDs L OALM 9 Osys OMST You can configure the second line of the LCD panel to display a custom message If the LCD panel is configured to display a custom message the Menu button and the 9020093 LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches M 13 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches LCD Panel Modes 14 Enter button are disabled See Configuring the LCD Panel Display on EX Series Switches CLI Procedure on page 166 The LCD panel has a backlight If the LCD panel is idle for 60 seconds the backlight turns off You can turn on the backlight by pressing the Menu or Enter button once After turning on the backlight you can toggle between the LCD panel menus by pressing the Menu button and navigate through the menu options by pressing the Enter button NOTE The chassis viewer in the J Web interface also displays the LCD panel From the J Web interface you can view real time status information in the LCD panel See Dashboard for EX Series Switches This
262. te Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 206 1H Safety Information Chapter 17 General Safety Information General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 Definitions of Safety Warning Levels for EX Series Switches on page 208 Fire Safety Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 210 Qualified Personnel Warning for EX Series Switches on page 211 Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden for EX Series Switches on page 212 General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the EX Series switch from damage The list of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations in your working environment so be alert and exercise good judgment at all times Perform only the procedures explicitly described in the hardware documentation for this product Make sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system services Keep the area around the chassis clear and free from dust before during and after installation Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry such as rings bracelets or chains which could become caught in the chassis Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous to your eyes Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the equipment unsafe
263. ter Wavelength 1310 nm Minimum Launch Power 5 dBm Maximum Launch Power 0 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 52 dBm Maximum Input Power 8 dBm Fiber Type SMF Core Cladding Size 9 125 um Modal Bandwidth Distance 80 km 49 7 miles DOM Support Not available 60 1H Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 3 Component Specifications Table 20 Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Ethernet Standard Specifications 10GBase SR Model Number EX SFP 10GE SR Rate 10 Gbps Connector Type LC Fiber Count Dual Transmitter Wavelength 850 nm Minimum Launch Power 7 3 dBm Maximum Launch Power 1 dBm Minimum Receiver Sensitivity 9 9 dBm Maximum Input Power 1 dBm Fiber Type MMF Core Cladding Size 62 5 125 62 5 125 50 125 50 125 50 125 um um um um um Fiber Grade FDDI OMI OM2 OM3 Modal Bandwidth 160 200 400 500 1500 MHz km MHz km MHz km MHz km MHz km Distance 26m 55m 66m 82m 500m 85 ft 108 ft 216 ft 269 ft 984 ft DOM Support Available Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 61 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 20 Optical Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches continued Ethernet Standard Specifications 10GBase LRM Model Number EX SFP
264. the OFF position and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert dient u te controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is Om u ervan te verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld kiest u op het schakelbord de stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient draait de stroomverbreker naar de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband in de UIT positie vast Varoitus Varmista ett tasavirtapiirissa ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden suorittamista Varmistaaksesi ett virta on KATKAISTU t ysin paikanna tasavirrasta huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin k nn suojakytkin KATKAISTU asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin etta se pysyy KATKAISTU asennossa Attention Avant de pratiquer l une quelconque des proc dures ci dessous v rifier que le circuit en courant continu n est plus sous tension Pour en tre s r localiser le disjoncteur situ sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu placer DC Power Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information le disjoncteur en position ferm e OFF et l aide d un ruban adh sif bloquer la poign e du disjoncteur en position OFF Warnung Vor Ausf hrung der folgenden Vorg nge ist sicherzustellen daf die Gleichstromschaltung keinen Str
265. thernet Switches 138 m Before you begin connecting a Virtual Chassis cable to an EX4200 switch ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions to prevent ESD damage see Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to connect a Virtual Chassis cable to an EX4200 switch m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap m Cross head screwdriver Ce NOTE If you order Virtual Chassis cables separately you must reuse the lockin y p y y g covers provided with the original cable or order Virtual Chassis cable locking covers also separately To connect a Virtual Chassis cable to an EX4200 switch see Figure 51 on page 158 1 Attach the electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis 2 Taking care not to touch module components pins leads or solder connections remove the Virtual Chassis cable from its bag 5 Using both hands place the Virtual Chassis cable connector in the empty Virtual Chassis port and slide it in gently until it is fully seated 4 Slide the locking cover over the Virtual Chassis cable connector 5 Tighten the screws on the locking cover by using the cross head screwdriver Figure 51 Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch 9 PES mache a a E S eS Slide locking co
266. till kraftledningar Metallobjekt hettas upp nar de kopplas ihop med str m och jord och kan f rorsaka allvarliga brannskador metallobjekt kan ocks sammansvetsas med kontakterna Lightning Activity Warning A WARNING Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity WARNING Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem dient u niet aan het systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen WARNING Varoitus l ty skentele j rjestelm n parissa l k yhdist tai irrota kaapeleita ukkosilmalla WARNING Attention Ne pas travailler sur le syst me ni brancher ou d brancher les c bles pendant un orage WARNING Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schlie en Sie keine Kabel an bzw trennen Sie keine ab wenn es gewittert P bb bb WARNING Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi durante un temporale con fulmini WARNING Advarsel Utfer aldri arbeid p systemet eller koble kabler til eller fra systemet nar det tordner eller lyner WARNING Aviso N o trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante per odos de mau tempo trovoada P bib WARNING jAtenci n No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante el transcurso de descargas el ctricas en la atm sfera 230 1H Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Serie
267. tion for specific problems related to uplink module ports on EX5200 and EX4200 switches 1 Virtual Chassis port VCP connection does not work on page 192 2 One of the last four network ports on an EX3200 switch with an SFP or SFP uplink module installed is disabled on page 195 Virtual Chassis port VCP connection does not work Problem The Virtual Chassis port VCP connection configured in an EX4200 switch does not work A port of the uplink module is set as a VCP 192 Mm The interface on the port in which an SFP or SFP transceiver is installed in an SFP uplink module is down Cause Solution Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Switch Components The uplink module installed in the switch was replaced Set a port in the uplink module as a VCP See Setting an Uplink Module Port as a Virtual Chassis Port CLI Procedure One of the last four network ports on an EX3200 switch with an SFP or SFP uplink module installed is disabled Problem Cause Solution Related Topics One of the last four built in ports ge 0 0 20 through ge 0 0 23 on 24 port models or ge 0 0 44 through ge 0 0 47 on 48 port models of an EX3200 switch with an SFP or SFP uplink module installed in it is disabled When you check the status with the CLI command show interfaces ge or with the J Web user interface the disabled port is not listed The last four built in ports use the same ASIC as the SFP uplink module Therefore if you install a tran
268. tions Table 4 LCD Panel Menu Options in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Table 5 Chassis Status LEDs in an EX3200 Switch Table 6 Chassis Status LEDs in an EX4200 Switch Table 7 Link Activity LED on Network Ports in EX3200 and EX4200 SWItChES 5 ise esit A ee ee epe Does rry ies aa eos Table 8 Status LED on Network Ports in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Table 9 Link Activity LED on the Management Port on an EX3200 or EX4200 Mg TEE Table 10 Status LED on the Management Port on an EX3200 or EX4200 e EE Table 11 Minimum Power Requirements for an EX3200 Switch Table 12 Minimum Power Requirements for an EX4200 Switch Table 15 AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Table 14 DC Power Supply LEDs in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches Component Specifications Table 15 Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX3200 or EX4200 SWItGEI id mri A NN eR e UA Table 16 EX Series Switches Console Port Connector Pinout nformat edit Ger eed e alar idet Pos Table 17 Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX5200 OP EX4200N9WIECDU EE Table 18 Optical Interface Support and Copper Interface Support for Gigabit Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Table 19 Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches ssssssss eee Table 20 Optical Interface Support for Gig
269. to the switch a licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch for example by causing a short circuit To meet safety and electromagnetic interference EMI requirements and to ensure proper operation you must connect EX3200 and EX4200 switches to earth ground before you connect them to power For installations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to connect to the earth ground For instructions on connecting earth ground see Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 m Install the power supply in the chassis For instructions on installing a power supply in an EX5200 or EX4200 switch see Installing a Power Supply in an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 150 To connect DC power to an EX5200 or EX4200 switch 1 Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and the screws on their faceplates are tightened 2 Ensure that the input circuit breaker is open so that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that the cable leads will not become active while you are connecting DC power NOTE The DC power supply in EX5200 and EX4200 switches has four terminals labeled A B A and B see Figure 56 on page 148 for connecting DC power source cables labeled positive and negative
270. topic describes m LCD Panel Modes on page 14 m LCD Panel Menus on page 15 The LCD panel operates in four modes boot idle status and maintenance The LCD panel operates in boot mode during switch reboot The boot mode displays the key milestones in the switch boot process The boot mode does not have any menu options After the boot process is complete the LCD panel automatically reverts to the Idle menu In an EX5200 switch the first line of the LCD panel displays the hostname In an EX4200 switch that is not a member of a Virtual Chassis the first line of the LCD panel displays the slot number the role of the switch and hostname For a standalone EX4200 switch the slot number is always OO and the role is always RE for master In an EX4200 switch that is a member of a Virtual Chassis the first line of the LCD panel displays m The slot number the member ID for the Virtual Chassis member mw Role of the switch in a Virtual Chassis RE for master BK for backup and LC for linecard member D Hostname In the idle mode the second line displays the mode of the network ports Status LED and the number of chassis alarms The number of alarms is updated every second In the status mode the second line displays m Virtual Chassis port VCP status for an EX4200 switch that is a member of a Virtual Chassis m Status of the power supply LCD Panel in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 2 Component Descriptions m Sta
271. tor Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 74 Example Configuring a Virtual Chassis Interconnected Across Multiple Wiring Closets Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration CLI Procedure You can add one or more EX4200 switches to an existing Virtual Chassis configuration Up to ten EX4200 switches can be included within a Virtual Chassis configuration You can add the new switches to either type nonprovisioned or preprovisioned of Virtual Chassis configuration See Configuring a Virtual Chassis CLI Procedure for descriptions of these types To add a switch to an existing Virtual Chassis configuration use the procedure that matches what you need to accomplish Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration Within the Same Wiring Closet on page 105 Adding a New Switch from a Different Wiring Closet to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration on page 106 Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis Configuration Using Autoprovisioning on page 108 Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration Within the Same Wiring Closet Before you begin be sure you have Mounted the new switch in a rack Confirmed that the new switch is powered off If you are expanding a preprovisioned configuration made a note of the serial number on the back of the switch You will need to edit the Virtual Chassis configuration to include the serial number of
272. tor pin and you want to connect your laptop or PC directly to the switch use a combination of the RJ 45 to DB 9 female adapter supplied with the switch and a USB to DB 9 male adapter You must provide the USB to DB 9 male adapter NOTE Most modems have an RS 232 DB 25 connector You must separately purchase an adapter to connect your modem to the RJ 45 to DB 9 adapter and Ethernet cable supplied with the switch Related Topics To connect a modem to the console port 1 2 3 Turn off power to the switch Turn off power to the modem Connect one end of the cable to the console port labeled CON or CONSOLE on the switch For the location of the console port on different EX Series switches m See Rear Panel of an EX2200 Switch m See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 m See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 m See Switch Fabric and Routing Engine SRE Module in an EX8208 Switch m See Routing Engine RE Module in an EX8216 Switch Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter supplied with your switch Connect the serial port adapter to the DB 9 female to DB 25 male adapter or other adapter appropriate for your modem Plug the modem adapter into the DB 25 connector on the modem Connect one end of the phone cable to the modem and the other end to your telephone network Turn on the power to your modem Power on the switch Connecting an EX Series Switch to
273. tual Chassis Configuration CLI Procedure zo etiem dated td ite decided te tae ptem autas 105 Adding a New Switch to an Existing Virtual Chassis Configuration Within the Same Wiring Closet nba de 105 Adding a New Switch from a Different Wiring Closet to an Existing Virtual Chassis ContgUratlOn sitere eet eter teme Toi ee tet e Pie even ER 106 Adding a New Switch to an Existing Preprovisioned Virtual Chassis Configuration Using Autoprovisioning sss 108 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components Installing the Switch 113 Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch ee 115 Unpacking an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch sssssssses 114 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch ssssssssss eee eettettttseeeeees 116 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desk or Other Level SIE eds d am au V ud P de e opa tt 117 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or A re RUM E KR E ML E LL sade E 118 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on Four Posts in a Rack or CAINE c LE 121 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch in a Recessed Position in a Rack or Cable dilo EE 124 Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Wall 125 Installing Switch Components 129 Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware COMPONENTS sitet eet lara te este 129 Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch ssss 150 Installing a Fan Tray in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch eec 13
274. tus LEDs in EX4200 Switches escssiseiiserirssrirerirrsrrrrrrrrrrrrr 18 Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 20 Management Port LEDs in EX5200 and EX4200 Switches ssssssse 24 Table of Contents WI vii Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Chapter 3 Part 2 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 viii Table of Contents Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches sse 26 AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 29 DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches 0 0 30 Cooling System and Airflow in an EX3200 Switch 31 Cooling System and Airflow in an EX4200 Switch 32 Uplink Modules in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches sss 33 SEP Uplink Module ott Ret t ett ta 54 SEP Uplink Module eee te a 55 AEP Uplink Module ete t dade etit cernentes 56 Component Specifications 39 USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch 59 Network Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX5200 or EX4200 SWIG i ene enfer re aate d degere cera rt ec WARE E CUERO Ye en 40 Console Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch 41 Management Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX5200 or EX4200 SWITCH DELLI E T 42 Optical Interface Support in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches ssssss 45 Uplink Modules Connector Pinout Information for EX3200 and EX4200 SWINE A ter e utt b b HE p e OM IR ame TCR 67 Virtual Chassis
275. tus of the fan and temperature m Version of JUNOS Software for EX Series switches loaded on the switch In the maintenance mode the second line displays one of the following options that you can use to configure and troubleshoot the switch m System halt m System reboot m Load rescue m Request VC port m Factory default m System EZSetup LCD Panel Menus The LCD panel has three menus Idle Status and Maintenance You can toggle between the LCD panel menus by pressing the Menu button and navigate through the menu options by pressing the Enter button Table 4 on page 15 describes the LCD panel menu options Table 4 LCD Panel Menu Options in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Menu Description IDLE In the Idle menu m Press Enter to cycle through the Status LED modes m ADM administrative status m DPX duplex m Power over Ethernet PoE m SPD speed See Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 20 for information on the Status LED modes m EXIT IDLE MENU Select this option to exit the Idle menu STATUS The Status menu has the following options Show VCP Status Displays the Virtual Chassis port VCP status Up Down Disabled This menu option is available only for an EX4200 switch that is a member of a Virtual Chassis configuration Show PSU Status Displays the status of the power supply OK Failed Absent Show Environment Status Displays the status of the fan and temperature m Fan st
276. uipped for Power over Ethernet PoE or only 8 ports equipped for PoE All models provide ports that have 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet connectors and optional 1 gigabit small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers 10 gigabit small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers or 10 gigabit small form factor pluggable XFP transceivers for use with fiber connections EX3200 switches include m A field replaceable power supply and an optional additional connection to an external power source m A field replaceable fan tray with single fan m JUNOS Software with its modular design that enables failed system processes to gracefully restart EX4200 switches provide connectivity for medium and high density environments and scalability for growing networks These switches can be deployed wherever you need a high density of Gigabit Ethernet ports 24 to 480 ports or redundancy Typically EX4200 switches are used in large branch offices campus wiring closets and data centers where they can be positioned as the top device in a rack to provide connectivity for all the devices in the rack You can connect individual EX4200 switches together to form one unit and manage the unit as a single chassis called a Virtual Chassis You can add more member switches to the Virtual Chassis as needed up to a total of 10 members EX4200 switches are available in models with 24 or 48 ports and with either all ports equipped for Power over Ethernet PoE
277. ure 15 on page 21 indicate the status of one of the four port parameters The port parameters are administrative status duplex mode Power over Ethernet PoE status and speed Table 7 on page 22 describes the Link Activity LED Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches M 21 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 7 Link Activity LED on Network Ports in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches LED Color State and Description Link Activity Green m Blinking The port and the link are active and there is link activity m Onsteadily The port and the link are active but there is no link activity m Off tThe port is not active Table 8 on page 25 describes the Status LED From the Idle menu of the LCD use the Enter button on the LCD panel to toggle between the ADM DPX POE and SPD indicators 22 1H Network Port LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 2 Component Descriptions Table 8 Status LED on Network Ports in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches LED LCD Indicator State and Description Status LED ADM Indicates the administrative status enabled or disabled The status indicators are m Green Administrative status enabled m Unlit Administrative status disabled LED DPX Indicates the duplex mode The uplink module ports are always set to full duplex therefore the LED is always green The status indicators for network ports on the front panel are m Gre
278. ure the rack or cabinet to the floor and building structure Wall Verify that the wall meets the minimum requirements for the installation of the switch Requirements for Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch ona Desktop or Wall on page 90 Verify that there is appropriate clearance in your selected location Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 Cables Acquire cables and connectors m Determine the number of cables needed based on your planned configuration m Review the maximum distance allowed for each cable Choose the length of cable based on the distance between the hardware components being connected Plan the cable routing and management Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches on page 85 m Installing and Connecting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 113 m Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 116 82 m Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 4 Site Preparation General Site Guidelines for EX Series Switches Efficient switch operation requires proper site planning and maintenance and proper layout of the equipment rack or cabinet if used and wiring closet To plan and create an acceptable operating environment for your EX Series switch and prevent environmen
279. ush down on the locking lever until it is in its lowest position 7 Grasp the power supply handle and pull firmly to slide it halfway out of the chassis 8 Place one hand under the power supply to support it and slide it completely out of the chassis Take care not to touch power supply components pins leads or solder connections 9 Place the power supply in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat stable surface Figure 67 Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch Locking lever Loosen captive screw Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch m 173 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Related Topics m Installing a Power Supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 130 m Installing and Removing EX3200 and EX4200 Switch Hardware Components on page 129 m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m Field Replaceable Units in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 16 m AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 98 m Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch on page 9 m Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch on page 11 Removing a Fan Tray from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch 174 m EX3200 and EX4200 switches have a single field replaceable unit FRU fan tray on the rear panel The fan tray is a hot removable and hot insertable FRU You can remove and replace it without powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions Before
280. uuden s ilytt miseksi jotta v ltyt n loukkaantumiselta Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita a Juniper Networks switch on asennettava telineeseen joka on kiinnitetty rakennukseen m Jos telineess ei ole muita laitteita aseta laite telineen alaosaan m Jos laite asetetaan osaksi t ytettyyn telineeseen aloita kuormittaminen sen alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineell ja siirry sitten sen yl osaan m Jos telinett varten on vakaimet asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen tai sen huoltamista siin A WARNING Attention Pour viter toute blessure corporelle pendant les op rations de montage ou de r paration de cette unit en casier il convient de prendre des 222 pw RackMounting and Cabinet Mounting Warnings for EX Series Switches Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information pr cautions sp ciales afin de maintenir la stabilit du syst me Les directives ci dessous sont destin es assurer la protection du personnel Le rack sur lequel est mont le Juniper Networks switch doit tre fix la structure du b timent Si cette unit constitue la seule unit mont e en casier elle doit tre plac e dans le bas Si cette unit est mont e dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placant l l ment le plus lourd dans le bas Si le casier est quip de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de r par
281. ver over virtual chassis cable connector Related Topics m Disconnecting a Virtual Chassis Cable from an EX4200 Switch on page 180 m Understanding Virtual Chassis Hardware Configuration on an EX4200 Switch on page 101 Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch Chapter 10 Installing Switch Components Understanding Virtual Chassis Components Planning the Virtual Chassis on page 102 Virtual Chassis Ports Connector Pinout Information for EX4200 Switches on page 74 Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch m 139 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches 140 HN Connecting a Virtual Chassis Cable to an EX4200 Switch Chapter 11 Connecting the Switch m Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 141 m Connecting AC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 m Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 m Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Network for Out of Band Management on page 152 m Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console on page 155 m Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Modem on page 155 m Connecting a Fiber Optic Cable to an EX Series Switch on page 159 Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch To meet safety and electromagnetic interference EMI requirements and to ensure proper operation you must connect the switches to earth ground before you connect them to power For installations that require a separate g
282. vers and receivers in the switch Electrical hazards as a result of power surges conducted over the lines into the equipment Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on EX Series Switches on page 256 m Power Supply in EX2200 Switches m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m AC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch m DC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch 84 Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines for EX Series Switches Chapter 4 Site Preparation Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches The switch must be installed in a rack or cabinet housed in a dry clean well ventilated and temperature controlled environment Ensure that these environmental guidelines are followed The site must be as dust free as possible because dust can clog air intake vents and filters reducing the efficiency of the switch cooling system Maintain ambient airflow for normal switch operation If the airflow is blocked or restricted or if the intake air is too warm the switch might overheat leading to the switch temperature monitor shutting down the switch to protect the hardware components Table 26 on page 85 provides the required environmental conditions for normal switch operation Table 26 EX Series Switch Environmen
283. vice agreement Related Topics We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an environmentally responsible manner m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m In Case of Electrical Accident Action to Take on an EX Series Switch on page 248 Qualified Personnel Warning for EX Series Switches A WARNING Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the EX Series switch Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd personeel uitgevoerd worden Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pateva henkil kunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa taman laitteen Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l appareil doit tre r alis par du personnel qualifi et comp tent Qualified Personnel Warning for EX Series Switches M 211 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Warnung Ger t nur von geschultem qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder auswechseln lassen Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad installare o sostituire questo apparecchio Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig oppleering ber montere eller bytte ut dette utstyret Aviso Este equipamento dever ser instalado ou substitu do apenas por pessoal devidamente treinado e qualificado jAtenci n E
284. w m Route and dress all cables to minimize the blockage of airflow to and from the chassis m Ensure that the spacing of rails and adjacent cabinets allows for the proper clearance around the switch and cabinet Related Topics m Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 m Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 87 m Mounting an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet on page 118 Requirements for Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desktop or Wall You can install the switch on a desktop or wall When choosing a location allow at least 6 in 15 2 cm of clearance between the front and back of the chassis and adjacent equipment or walls Ensure that the wall onto which the switch is installed is stable and securely supported If you are mounting the switch in sheetrock wall board with a gypsum plaster core or in wall board not backed by wall studs use hollow wall anchors capable of supporting the combined weight of two fully loaded chassis Insert the screws into wall studs wherever possible to provide added support for the chassis Use the wall mount kit from Juniper Networks to mount the switch on a wall The wall mount kit is not part of the standard package and needs to be ordered separately 90 1H Requirements for Mounting an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on a Desktop or Wall Chapter 5 Mounting and Clearance Requirements Re
285. wer supply has an internal failure Related Topics m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m Connecting AC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 146 DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches The DC power supply in an EX3200 or EX4200 switch is on the rear panel Table 14 on page 50 describes the LEDs on the DC power supplies in EX5200 and EX4200 switches Table 14 DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches LED Label Color Description LED A Red Inputs A and B are normal but there is no output LED B Red LED A Green Inputs A and B are normal output is normal LED B Green LED A Flash Red Input A has failed because the power supply fuse has failed input voltage is low or there is a loose connection output is LED B Green normal LED A Green Input B has failed because the power supply fuse has failed input voltage is low or there is a loose connection output is LED B Flash Red normal LED A Flash Red Both inputs have failed because the power supply fuse has failed input voltage is low or there is a loose connection LED B Flash Red output is normal LED A Off There is no input there is no output LED B Off 30 Related Topics m Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 26 m Connecting DC Power to an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 148 DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 2 Comp
286. wer requirements for each model of EX4200 switch The maximum power available to each PoE port is 15 4 W Table 12 Minimum Power Requirements for an EX4200 Switch Model Number Number of PoE enabled Ports Minimum Power Requirement EX4200 24T 8 320 W EX4200 48T 8 320 W EX4200 24P 24 600 W EX4200 48P 48 930 W EX4200 24F 320 W EX4200 24T DC 0 190 W EX4200 48T DC 0 190 W EX4200 24F DC 190W To avoid electrical injury follow instructions in Installing a Power Supply in an EX5200 or EX4200 Switch on page 150 and Removing a Power Supply from an EX3200 or EX4200 Switch on page 172 carefully 28 HW Power Supply in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Chapter 2 Component Descriptions NOTE After powering on an EX5200 or EX4200 switch wait for at least 60 seconds before powering it off After powering off an EX3200 or EX4200 switch wait for at least 60 seconds before powering it back on After an EX3200 or EX4200 switch has been powered on it can take up to 60 seconds for status indicators such as LEDs on the power supply show chassis command output and messages on the LCD to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds Related Topics m AC Power Cord Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 98 m AC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 29 m DC Power Supply LEDs in EX3200 and EX420
287. wing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico s en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen WARNING Varoitus T m varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa Olet tilanteessa joka voi johtaa ruumiinvammaan Ennen kuin ty skentelet mink n laitteiston parissa ota selv s hk kytkent ihin liittyvist vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien ehk isykeinoista WARNING Attention Ce symbole d avertissement indique un danger Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels Avant de travailler sur un quipement soyez conscient des dangers pos s par les circuits lectriques et familiarisez vous avec les proc dures couramment utilis es pour viter les accidents WARNING Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr Sie befinden sich in einer Situation die zu einer K rperverletzung f hren k nnte Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem Ger t beginnen seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unf llen bewu t WARNING Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatu
288. witch installation Table 24 Site Preparation Checklist Item or Task For More Information Performed By Date Environment Verify that environmental factors such as temperature and humidity do not exceed switch tolerances Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches on page 85 Power Measure distance between external power sources and switch installation site Locate sites for connection of system grounding Calculate the power consumption and requirements Power Specifications for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 97 Hardware Configuration Choose the number and types of switches you want to install EX3200 and EX4200 Switches Hardware Overview on page 5 Rack or Cabinet Site Preparation Checklist for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches m 821 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Table 24 Site Preparation Checklist continued Item or Task For More Information Performed By Date Verify that your rack or cabinet meets the minimum requirements for the installation of the switch Rack Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 87 Cabinet Requirements for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 89 Plan rack or cabinet location including required space clearances Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches on page 91 Sec
289. witches Mm 247 Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Ethernet Switches Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN energiesystemen Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN s hk voimaj rjestelmien yhteydess Attention Ce dispositif a t con u pour fonctionner avec des syst mes d alimentation TN Warnung Das Ger t ist f r die Verwendung mit TN Stromsystemen ausgelegt Avvertenza I dispositivo stato progettato per l uso con sistemi di alimentazione TN Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN stremsystemer Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN jAtenci n El equipo est disenado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentaci n tipo TN Varning Enheten ar konstruerad for anvandning tillsammans med elkraftssystem av TN typ Related Topics m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 207 m General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings for EX Series Switches on page 255 m Grounded Equipment Warning for EX Series Switches on page 226 Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning for EX Series Switches on page 240 In Case of Electrical Accident Action to Take on an EX Series Switch 248 m Related Topics If an electrical accident results in an injury take the following actions in this order 1 Usecaution Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further injury 2 Disconnect pow
290. witches are shipped with a three wire electrical cord with a grounding type plug that fits only a grounding type power outlet Do not circumvent this safety feature Equipment grounding must comply with local and national electrical codes You must provide an external certified circuit breaker rated minimum 20 A in the building installation The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device for the switch The socket outlet must be near the switch and be easily accessible For EX Series switches that have more than one power supply connection you must ensure that all power connections are fully disconnected so that power to the switch is completely removed to avoid electric shock To disconnect power unplug all power cords one for each power supply Note the following warnings printed on the label next to the power supplies CAUTION THIS UNIT HAS MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY CORD DISCONNECT ALL POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK 238 HW AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for EX Series Switches Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information ATTENTION CET APPAREIL COMPORTE PLUS D UN CORDON D ALIMENTATION AFIN DE PR VENIR LES CHOCS LECTRIQUES D BRANCHER TOUT CORDON D ALIMENTATION AVANT DE FAIRE LE D PANNAGE Power Cable Warning Japanese WARNING The attached power cable is only for this product Do not use the cable for another product SE ILA P SO RR I Key H amp C
291. y of Components Provided with an EX5200 or EX4200 SWIECK A tris D pr bcr pend D etie E E tes 115 Connecting the Switch 141 Table 55 POFUSEttn88 e reet e e etc ER sete P Een 157 About This Topic Collection m How to Use This Guide on page xxi m List of EX Series Guides for JUNOS Release 10 1 on page xxi m Downloading Software on page xxiii m Documentation Symbols Key on page xxiii m Documentation Feedback on page xxv m Requesting Technical Support on page xxv How to Use This Guide Complete documentation for the EX Series product family is provided on webpages at http www juniper net techpubs en US release independent information products pathway pages ex series product index html We have selected content from these webpages and created a number of EX Series guides that collect related topics into a book like format so that the information is easy to print and easy to download to your local computer This guide Complete Hardware Guide for EX3200 and EX4200 Switches collects together information about the EX5200 fixed configuration and EX4200 virtual chassis switches The release notes are at http www juniper net techpubs en US junos10 1 information products topic collections release notes 10 1 junos release notes 10 1 pdf List of EX Series Guides for JUNOS Release 10 1 Title Description Complete Hardware Guide for EX2200 Switches Component descriptions site preparation installation replacement and s

Juniper Networks EX3200 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents